Hit7080 - p1

Optical Networks
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;

General Topics
FT5242EN02GLA01
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Legal notice
Intellectual Property Rights
All copyrights and intellectual property rights for Nokia Siemens Networks training documentation, product
documentation and slide presentation material, all of which are forthwith known as Nokia Siemens Networks training
material, are the exclusive property of Nokia Siemens Networks. Nokia Siemens Networks owns the rights to copying,
modification, translation, adaptation or derivatives including any improvements or developments. Nokia Siemens
Networks has the sole right to copy, distribute, amend, modify, develop, license, sublicense, sell, transfer and assign the
Nokia Siemens Networks training material. Individuals can use the Nokia Siemens Networks training material for their
own personal self-development only, those same individuals cannot subsequently pass on that same Intellectual
Property to others without the prior written agreement of Nokia Siemens Networks. The Nokia Siemens Networks
training material cannot be used outside of an agreed Nokia Siemens Networks training session for development of
groups without the prior written agreement of Nokia Siemens Networks.
Indemnity
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product defined in the
introduction of this documentation. This document is not an official customer document and Nokia Siemens Networks
does not take responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. This document is intended for the use of Nokia
Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which the document is submitted. No part of
this documentation may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form or means without the prior written
permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly
trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes
customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity or performance of the
mentioned hardware or software products are given as is and all liability arising in connection with such hardware or
software products shall be defined conclusively and finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks
and the customer.
IN NO EVENT WILL Nokia Siemens Networks BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTATION OR FOR ANY
DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
OR ANY LOSSES SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY OR DATA, that might arise from the use of this document or the information in it.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
MANDATORY LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS
DOCUMENT. NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR
WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE.
This document and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other intellectual property rights
according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation.
Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners, and they are
mentioned for identification purposes only.
FT5242EN02GLA01
Export Control Marks:
N / 5E991
This course is subject to the European Export Control Restrictions.
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks. All rights reserved.

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of utility model or design,
are reserved.
Technical modifications possible.
Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written
contract.
II
FT5242EN02GLA01
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course
introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General
Topics
Sub-sections
Safety instructions
Hardware and functionality
Operating terminal
Operation: Traffic Setup
Protection Features
Maintenance
Abbreviations
Appendix
SURPASS hiT 7080

OAM; General Topics
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
III
10
Warnhinweise
In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangslufig bestimmte Teile der Gerte unter Spannung. Einige Teile
knnen auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Krperverletzungen und
Sachschden fhren.
Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die Anlagen installiert
und wartet.
Beachten Sie bitte die ntigen Sicherheitsanforderungen und leisten Sie durch ein problembewusstes
Verhalten Ihren Beitrag zur Verhtung von Unfllen jeglicher Art. Gefahren fr Leib und Leben / Leben
und Gesundheit bzw. Verletzungen, die aus sicherheitswidrigem Handeln resultieren knnen, sind von
einer Haftung durch das Nokia Siemens Networks Training Institute ausgeschlossen.
Warnings
High voltages are present in certain parts of this equipment. Some parts can also have high operating
temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in
equipment damage.
Therefore only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
Please ensure the necessary safety requirements are met and, by demonstrating a responsible
attitude, play your part in avoiding accidents of any kind. Danger to life and limb, life and well being or
injuries that could result from actions adverse to safety are excluded from any liability on the part of
the Nokia Siemens Networks Training Institute.
Atencin
Algunos elementos de este equipo presentan tensiones altas. Incluso algunos componentes pueden
presentar alta temperatura.
No observar estas condiciones y las instrucciones de seguridad puede causar daos personales, as
como daos al equipo.
Por lo tanto el sistema debe ser instalado y mantenido por personal cualificado.
Tenga presente los requerimientos de seguridad y contribuya a la prevencin de accidentes de toda
ndole, actuando consciente de los problemas que pudieran surgir. El ' Nokia Siemens Networks
Training Institute' no se responsabiliza por daos y perjuicios resultantes de actuaciones contrarias a
los aspectos de seguridad y que pongan en peligro la salud y la vida de las personas involucradas.
Attention
Des tensions leves sont inevitablement prsentes des points spcifiques de cet quipement
lectrique. Certains lments peuvent aussi avoir en service des temperatures leves.
La non-observation de ces conditions et des instructions de scurit peut engendrer des dgats
personnelles ou un endomagement du matriel.
Pour ces raisons seulement le personnel form et qualifi est permi dinstaller et de maintenir le
systme.
Veuillez tenir compte des exigences de scurit ncessaires et contribuer la prvention des
accidents de toutes sortes par un comportement conscient des risques. L'Nokia Siemens Networks
Training Institute dcline toute responsabilit pour les dangers menaant le corps et la vie / la vie et la
sant et/ou les blessures pouvant rsulter d'actes contraires la scurit.
IV
FT5242EN02GLA01
Sub-section reference
Sub-section identification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FT52421EN02GLA1 Course intro

FT52422EN02GLA1 Safety instruction
FT52423EN02GLA1 HW & functionality
FT52424EN02GLA1 Operating terminal
FT52425EN02GLA1 Operating Traffic Setup
FT52426EN02GLA1 Protection Features
FT52427EN02GLA1 Maintenance
FT52428EN02GLA1 Abbreviations
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
- 44
- 22
- 70
- 56
- 78
- 106
- 62
- 26
This document consists of 464 pages.
FT5242EN02GLA01
Foreword
The training materials that are handed out are meant for training purposes only. The
accompanying document is not a replacement for the official system documentation,
and is not meant for self-study. The official system documentation is the only licensed
reference work for carrying out work in the field. This student file is your own
property.
At the end of the course, your course conductor will give you some course evaluation
sheets. We ask you to fill out these sheets and would be pleased to receive
suggestions for course improvement regarding the carrying out of the courses and
materials used.
We at Nokia Siemens Networks wish you successful training.
Training management
VI
FT5242EN02GLA01
Declaration
I confirm, that the software made available to me during the courses from the Nokia
Siemens Networks Training Institute for training and practice purposes, will not be
further copied outside of the training.
Furthermore I assure that no software will be copied on to the training PCs, without
the explicit consent of the trainer.
With my signature on the attendance list, I confirm that I will adhere to both of the
above requests.
FT5242EN02GLA01
VII
VIII
FT5242EN02GLA01
Course introduction
Course introduction
Contents
1
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
Agenda
Course portfolio
SURPASS hiT 7080
SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050
SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025
SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020
SURPASS hiT 7500
SURPASS hiT 7300
SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet
TNMS Core
TNMS-M
Technology training
Further offers
FT52421EN02GLA1
3
5
6
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
Course introduction
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Agenda
1.Welcome to the Training Institute

2.Prior to the start of the course:
Safety Instructions
3.Course information
4.During the course:
Breaks; Lunch etc.
5.On completion of the course:
Questionnaires; Certificates
Fig. 1
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Course portfolio
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
2.1
SURPASS hiT 7080
SURPASS hiT 7080 - Standard Training for Service

Aim
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM
tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5242 covers
general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a
deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced
Topics courses FT5242, FT5243, FT5244, FT5245, FT5236, FT5247,FT5248 and
FT5249 are designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data
Networking, Synchronization and Commissioning.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network elements.
Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive
understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more
efficiently.
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
FT5242-00S
SURPASS hiT 7080 OM;
General Topics
Core and Advanced

training courses
Duration: 2 days
FT5243-00S
SDH and Equipment Core
Functionalities Advanced
Topics
Duration: 3 days
OR
FT5249-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
TG7010-01S
SURPASS hiT 7080

Installation Commissioning
SURPASS hiT 70 series

OAM; Synchronization
Advanced Topics
Introduction to Data
Networking
Networking
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S
TG7011-01S
Understanding TCP/IP
Networks
Networks
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 3 days
TG7020-01S
FT5247-00S
Hands-On TCP/IP

ASON/ GMPLS Advanced
Topics
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 4 days
FT5244-00S
EoS Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
FT5248-00S
Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training
recommended - but only optional

Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

EoS- L2 Switching Advanced
Topics
Duration: 2 days
OR
FT5245-00S
RPR Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
Fig. 2 SURPASS hiT 7080 Core and advanced training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 O&M; General Topics (FT5242-00S)

Target Group
Service
Aim
The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to perform selected
general operation and maintenance tasks according to given instructions. To get a
deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks refer to the
respective Advanced Topics courses
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities AT (FT5243)
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS Advanced Topics (FT5244)
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; RPR Advanced Topics (FT5245)
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; GMPLS Advanced Topics (FT5247)
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS L2 Switching Advanced Topics (FT5248)
SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics (FT5236)
SURPASS hiT 7080 Installation & Commissioning (FT5249)
Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a
variety of Hands-On exercises.
The participant will be able to perform all daily routine tasks on your network
elements
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.
Contents
Safety Instructions
Hardware and Functionality
Introduction to the Equipment
Hardware Design and Functionality
Operating Terminal
General Features
Getting Started: What you need to navigate
Operation
Configuration of SDH/PDH Cards and Ports
Configuration of Cross Connections
Configuration of Path, Line and Card Protection
Maintenance
Alarm Handling
Basic Troubleshooting
Replacement of Cards and Modules
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Comment
Training is performed on the latest released SW version. Important hint for On-Site
Courses: This course has full d-lab ability (access to remote training lab)!
Duration
2 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities Advanced
Topics (FT5243-00S)
Target Group
Service
Aim
The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support the network
element in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in the contents.
The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks. Training equipment is
prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On
exercises. All in all you will be able to perform all SDH and Equipment Core
Functionalities relevant service tasks in your network
Prerequisites
Course SURPASS hiT 7080 O&M; General Topics FT5242 or practical OAM
experience on SDH equipment is required
Contents
Safety Instructions
System Overview
Introduction to the Equipment
Hardware Design and Functionality
Operation Terminal: Advanced Topics
Application SW Installation
Administration and NCT Configuration
Operation: Advanced Topics
Ring Protection Configuration Principles
Synchronization
Basic Concept
Configuration of Synchronization Parameters
Performance Management
Basic Concept
Configuration of Performance Parameters
Configuration of TCN and SD Thresholds
MCF Configuration
Introduction to DCN
Configuration of Message Communication Function
Overhead Access
10
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Maintenance: Advanced Topics

Alarm Configurations
Advanced Troubleshooting
Administration
Access Management
Backup and Restore
Miscellaneous
Comment
Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote training lab; some few
restrictions in practice remain)!
Duration
3 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1
11
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS P2P Advanced Topics (FT5244-00S)

Target Group
Service
Aims
The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks.
variety of Hands-On exercises
All in all the participant will be able to perform all Ethernet over SONET/SDH EoS
relevant service tasks in the network
Prerequisites
Required:
Course SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities
AT (FT5243)
Recommended:
Course IP Technology Introduction to Data Networking (TG7010)
Course Understanding TCP/IP Networks (TG7011)
Course Hands-On TCP/IP (TG7020)
Contents
Technology and Applications
Ethernet
Next Generation SDH
Transport Networks Services Portfolio
Ethernet Multiplexing and Mapping Functions
Configuration Management for transparent p2p connections
Ethernet Card and Port Configuration
Concatenation Configuration
GFP Assignment
Cross Connection Management
LCAS
Fault Management
Ethernet Testing
12
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Comment
Training is performed on the latest released SW version
Important hint for On-Site Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote
training lab; some few restrictions in practice remain)!
Duration
2 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1
13
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics (FT5236-00S)

Target Group
Service
Planning Engineers
Aims
The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support
synchronization issues in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in
the contents. The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks.
variety of Hands-On exercises
All in all the participant will be able to perform all Synchronization relevant service
tasks in the network
Prerequisites
Required for Service:
Course SURPASS hiT 7070, 7050 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core
Functionalities Advanced Topics (FT5233)
Required for Planning Engineers:
Course Next Generation Optical Network (FT1102)
Contents
Synchronization, Terms and Definitions
Synchronization Basic Principles

Standards and Recommendations
Demonstration of Jitter
Synchronization Network Architecture
Clock Types
Clock Distribution
Reading the Network Synchronization Plan
Synchronization in SDH Rings
Setting Options of Synchronization Parameters

Synchronization Transfer...
...across SDH/PDH Boundaries

...towards PSTN and PABX
...via ATM networks
14
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Handling Failures and Reconfigurations
Automatic Reconfiguration
Test Applications
Comment
Important hint for On-Site Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote
training lab; some few restrictions in practice remain)!
Duration
2 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1
15
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080; EoS- L2 Switching Advanced Topics (FT5248-00S)

Target Group
Service
Aims
The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks. Training equipment is
prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On
exercises. All in all the participant will be able to perform all Ethernet over
SONET/SDH EoS relevant service tasks in the network
Prerequisites
Required:
Course SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS AT (FT5244)
Recommended:
Course IP Technology Introduction to Data Networking (TG7010)
Course Understanding TCP/IP Networks (TG7011)
Course Hands-On TCP/IP (TG7020)
Contents
Ethernet Switching: Advanced Topics
Spanning Tree Algorithm
Link Aggregation Group (LAG)
Multicast and IGMP Snooping
VLAN Introduction
How VLANs work
Provider Bridges
Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP)
VLANs and QoS
Configuration Management for mp2mp connections
L2 switch card and port configuration
Concatenation configuration and GFP assignment
LAG
VLAN and QoS
MSTP
Multicast and IGMP Snooping
VLAN Tunneling
16
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Fault Management
Ethernet Testing
Comment
Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote training lab; some few
restrictions in practice remain)!
Duration
2 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1
17
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 Installation & Commissioning (FT5249-00S)

Target Group
Service
Aims
The main objective of this course is to enable you to check the network element
installation and to commission it according prescribed procedures.
variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to commission the SURPASS hiT 7080 equipment.
Prerequisites
Course FT5243 is required. Courses FT5244 is recommended to give a
comprehensive background
Contents
Getting Started
Implementation Overview
Basic Prerequisites
Hardware
Racks and Sub-racks
Service and Operating Interfaces
Commissioning
Preconditions and Preparations
Powering up the System
Configuring the Network Elements
Comment
Training is performed on the latest released SW version.
Duration
1 Day
18
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
Course introduction
2.2
SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 - Standard Training for Service

Aim
Topics courses FT5233, FT5234, FT5235, FT5236, FT5236, FT5237, FT5238 and
network elements.
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
20
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
FT5232-00S
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050
OM; General Topics
Core and Advanced

training courses
Duration:3 days
FT5233-00S
OAM; SDH and Equipment Core
Topics
Duration:3 days
OR
FT5239-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
TG7010-01S


Advanced Topics
Networking
Networking
Duration:2 days
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S
Networks
TG7011-01S
Networks
Duration:3 days
Duration: 3 days
Duration:1 day
Duration: 2 days
TG7020-01S
FT5237-00S
Hands-On TCP/IP

Topics
Duration:2 days
Duration: 4 days
FT5234-00S
OAM; EoS P2P Advanced
Topics
Duration:2 days
OR
Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training
FT5238-00S


OAM; EoS- L2 Switching
Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
OR
FT5235-00S
RPR Advanced Topics
Duration: 3 days
Fig. 3 SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 Core and advanced training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
Course introduction
2.3
SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025
SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025 - Standard Training for Service

Aim
Topics courses FT5223, FT5224, FT5225, FT5236, FT5228, and FT5229 are
designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data Networking,
Synchronization and Commissioning.
network elements.
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
22
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
FT5222-00S
SURPASS hiT 7060
(R4.x),hiT 7035, hiT 7025 OM;
General Topics
Core and Advanced

training courses
Duration: 2 days
FT5223-00S
SURPASS hiT 7060
(R.4x),hiT 7035,hiT 7025 OAM;
SDH and Equipment Core
Topics
Duration: 3 days
OR
FT5229-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
SURPASS hiT 7060

(R4.x), hiT 7035,hiT 7025

OAM; Synchronisation
Advanced Topics
Networking
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S
Networks
Duration: 3 days
TG7020-01S
Hands-On TCP/IP
Duration: 2 days
FT5224-00S
Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training
SURPASS hiT 7060

(R4.x), hiT 7035, hiT 7025 OAM;
EoS P2P Advanced Topics

Duration: 2 days
FT5228-00S
SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT
7035, hiT 7025 OAM; EoS- L2
Switching Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
Fig. 4 SURPASS 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025 Core and advanced training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Course introduction
2.4
SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020
SURPASS hiT 7060, 7030, 7020 - Standard Training for Service

Aim
Topics courses FT5213, FT5214, FT5215, FT5236, and FT5219 are designed. Those
cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data Networking, Synchronization and
Commissioning.
network elements.
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
24
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
FT5212-00S
SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 OM;
General Topics
Core and Advanced

training courses
Duration: 2 days
FT5213-00S
SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 OAM; SDH and
Equipment Core Functionalities
Advanced Topics
Duration: 3 days
OR
FT5219-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 Installation
Commissioning

OAM; Synchronisation
Advanced Topics
Networking
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S
Networks
Duration: 3 days
TG7020-01S
Hands-On TCP/IP
Duration: 2 days
FT5214-00S
Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training
SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 OAM; EoS
Advanced Topics

Duration: 2 days
OR
FT5215-00S
RPR Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
Fig. 5 SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020 Core and advanced training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
Course introduction
2.5
SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 - Standard Training for Service

Aim
Topics courses FT5233, FT5234, FT5235, FT5236, FT5236, FT5237, FT5238 and
network elements.
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
26
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
FT5232-00S
OM; General Topics
Core and Advanced

training courses
Duration:3 days
FT5233-00S
OAM; SDH and Equipment Core
Topics
Duration:3 days
OR
FT5239-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
TG7010-01S


Advanced Topics
Networking
Networking
Duration:2 days
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S
Networks
TG7011-01S
Networks
Duration:3 days
Duration: 3 days
Duration:1 day
Duration: 2 days
TG7020-01S
FT5237-00S
Hands-On TCP/IP

Topics
Duration:2 days
Duration: 4 days
FT5234-00S
OAM; EoS P2P Advanced
Topics
Duration:2 days
OR
Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training
FT5238-00S


OAM; EoS- L2 Switching
Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
OR
FT5235-00S
RPR Advanced Topics
Duration: 3 days
Fig. 6 SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 Core and advanced training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27
Course introduction
2.6
SURPASS hiT 7500

Aim
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM and
Commissioning tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents.
network elements.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
basic knowledge in SDH and fiber optics is required.
28
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Core and Advanced

training courses
FT2222-00S
SURPASS hiT 7500 OAM:
General Topics
Duration:5 days
FT2229-00S
SURPASS hiT 7500
Commissioning and Advanced
Topics
Duration:4 days
FT2322-00S
SURPASS hiT 7500;
TransNet Planning Tool
Duration:3 days
Caption
Core Training
Advanced Training
Fig. 7 SURPASS hiT 7500 Core and advanced training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Course introduction
2.7
SURPASS hiT 7300

Aims
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM and
Commissioning tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents.
network elements.
A variety of offered Technology courses will give you a comprehensive understanding
and solid background to carry out your network studies even more efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
30
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Core and Advanced

training courses
FT2212-00S
SURPASS hiT 7300 OAM:
General Topics
Duration: 4 days
FT2219-00S
SURPASS hiT 7300
Commissioning and Advanced
Topics
Duration: 3 days
Caption
Core Training
Advanced Training
Fig. 8 SURPASS hiT 7300 - Core and advanced training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
Course introduction
2.8
SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet
SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet - Standard Training for Planning

Aims
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to plan SURPASS hiT
7500 topologies and routes. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course
contents.
For this product course the planning tool is used to perform a variety of Hands-On
exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced planning
tasks.
Target Group
Engineering and Planning
Prerequisites
32
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Core training courses
TG6240-01S
Understanding DWDM
Duration: 5 hours
FT2322-00S
SURPASS hiT 7500;
TransNet Planning Tool
Duration: 3 days
Caption
Core Training

Web-based Training - Web-based learning
software
Fig. 9 SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet- Core training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33
Course introduction
2.9
TNMS Core
Training Option TNMS Core - Standard Training for Service

Aims
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all important
operation and administration tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual
course contents. FT9212 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily
routine tasks. For further tasks Advanced Topics courses FT9222, FT9232 and
FT1802 are designed. Those cover operation and administration tasks in various
fields like DWDM and Data Communication Network DCN. Course FT9219 covers
Installation and Commissioning.
network management system.
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
34
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Participation on Siemens
network element courses
is recommended to get a
firm background.
Core and Advanced

training courses
OR
Management of pure
SDH networks.
Management of mixed
SDH and DWDM
networks.
Management of pure
DWDM networks.
OR
FT9212-00S
FT9212-00S
FT9222-00S
FT9232
TNMS-Core/CDM
Operation and Administration
for Next Generation SDH
networks
TNMS-Core/CDM
for Next Generation SDH
networks
TNMS-Core/CDM
for hiT 7300
TNMS
for hiT 7500
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 5 days
Duration: 5 days
OR
FT9232
FT9222-00S
TNMS
for hiT 7500
TNMS-Core/CDM
for hiT 7300
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 1 day
OR
TG7010-01S
FT9219-00S
Networking
TNMS-Core Installation
and Commissioning
Duration:2 days
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S
Networks
Duration:3 days
Caption
Core Training
Advanced Training
FT1802-00S
DCN in Next Generation
SDH Networks
Technology Training
Duration:4 days
Fig. 10 TNMS Core/CDM - Core and advanced training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
35
Course introduction
2.10
TNMS-M
Training Option TNMS-M - Standard Training for Service

Aims
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all important
operation and administration tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual
course contents. FT9262 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily
routine tasks. For further tasks the Advanced Topics course FT1802, is designed.
This covers operation and administration tasks in Data Communication Network
DCN.
network management system.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
Comment
TNMS-M LCT is not covered in this course sequence; it is part of the network
element training
36
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Core and Advanced

training courses
FT0108-00S
SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 - Standard
Training for Service
At least one course
FT9262-00S
TNMS-M Operation and
Administration
Duration: 3 days
OR
FT1802-00S
DCN in Next Generation
SDH Networks
Duration: 4 days
Caption
Curriculum, composed of several course
modules
Prerequisites
Core Training
Advanced Training
Fig. 11 TNMS-M Core and advanced training courses
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37
Course introduction
2.11
Technology training
Training Option IP Technology Training

Aims
The main objective of the IP Basics Package for everybody is to get an overview
about all technologies and applications used in the IP world. It comprises the
Introduction to Data Networks for the newcomer and gives advanced information in
the wide field of IP level 2 - 4 Switch technologies such as TCP/IP and
Internetworking LAN as well as the WAN technologies ATM and Frame Relay plus
topics of Internetworking WAN/LAN. The benefit of this package is that the
participant has a general understanding of IP including the WAN interfaces. The
advanced training courses will lead the student to deepen specific IP topics in
regard to layer 2, routing protocols, Quality of Service QoS, Security and the WAN
topics ATM and Frame Relay and thus prepares in all aspects for the next
generation network.
Target Group
People from all working areas, who need a comprehensive knowledge of data
networks.
Prerequisites
Basic knowledge of telecommunication
38
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
TG7010-01S
Networking
Duration: 2 days
OR
TG7018-01S
TG7019-01S
TG7011-01S
Technology and
Applications of Frame Relay
Technology and
Applications of ATM
Networks
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 3 days
OR
TG7020-01S
Hands-On TCP/IP
Duration: 2 days
OR
TG7012-01S
IP Multiservice Networks
Duration: 3 days
OR
OR
TG7013-01S
TG7014-01S
Ethernet: From LAN to

Metro
TCP/IP Advanced
TG7016-01S
TG7015-01S
IP and QoS: IntServ,

DiffServ, MPLS
IT Security in Telco
Networks - Intro
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 3 days
OR
Caption
Prerequisites
Core Training
Advanced Training
Supplementary Training
TG7021-01S
IT Security Hacking in
Telco Networks - Workshop
Duration: 4 days
Fig. 12 Technology training
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39
Course introduction
2.12
2.12.1
Further offers
d-lab
What is d-lab?
Distant lab or d-lab is a distant electronic laboratory (set of electronic equipment)
which can be accessed remotely
via Internet or
via ISDN dial-up connection
independently from the location of the equipment
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year
worldwide access possible

For the user d-lab offers the same functionality as a lab next door if the functions of
the equipment can be handled via PC controlled interfaces.
Only real hands-on activities like "insert/change modules" are not possible via remote
access.
Implementation
System/Personnel Requirements
System requirements for using d-lab
i386 compatible workstation PC, Standard PC

Access to the Internet
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher
Java enabled
Cookies enabled
Java runtime environment, at least Version 1.3.1
Port 443 must be allowed on Corporate Firewall
Possibilities
Remote Access
Connect class rooms all over the world to a centralized hardware laboratory
High availability
Round-the-clock shift operation possible

Particularly suitable for
application oriented training

life demos
configuration exercises
40
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Fig. 13 D-LAB
Customers' Added Value
Only class room PCs with Internet access required

Worldwide access possible
Reduce equipment costs by centralization of hardware
Increase availability of own hardware
Save travel costs
Reduce down-time costs
Success Stories
Carrier
Next Generation Optical Networks
Australia, Germany,
Croatia, Italy
Carrier Next Generation

Switching SURPASS/EWSD
Czech Republic, Thailand,

Germany, Vietnam
Carrier Next Generation

Switching NetManager
Thailand,
Germany
"I was surprised how useful can be the d-laboratory for teaching of topics!"
Course participant feedback
FT52421EN02GLA1
41
Course introduction
2.12.2
Synchronous Virtual University
What is SVU?
The Synchronous Virtual University SVU is web-based learning method.
Moderator(s)/Trainer(s) communicate with the participants via the Internet.
SVU allows theoretical presentation and practical presentation with d-lab (see above)
as well. It is specially aimed for realizing short trainings. Those can be a short info
about new products and or features, product training for minor upgrades, technology
etc..
Field of Applications
Training
Collaboration
Announcement
Benefits
Communication via short paths

Flexible locations of instructors
Arbitrary locations of participants
Positive impact on project development due to information flow
PACT impact through cuts in travel costs
Direct contact with the course instructor
Technical Requirements
Standard PC
Sound card
Headset (commercially available)
We recommend 128 kbit/s for your internet access (a lower bandwidth might result
in a poor quality).
Set the screen resolution to 1024 x 768 pixels and 256 colors.
Java needs to be activated in your browser.
By using a PC optiClient, the application needs to be closed. If it is possible,
please activate call forwarding to the voice box during the session.
42
FT52421EN02GLA1
Course introduction
Moderator
Participant
Internet/
Intranet
Participant
Participant
Moderator
Fig. 14 SVU
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52421EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
43
Course introduction
Links to the
Nokia Siemens Networks Training Academy
Internet: https://networks-academy.nokiasiemensnetworks.com/nsninternet/
Intranet: https://networks-academy.inside.nokiasiemensnetworks.com/nsnintranet/
44
FT52421EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
Safety instructions
Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4
4.1
Protective measures
Protection from high voltages
Protective grounding
Protection from escaping laser light
Handling
Handling of modules with electrostatic sensitive devices
Handling optical fiber connectors and lines
Handling batteries
Notes
Notes on operating the device
Notes on working on the subracks
Weight information
Parts with high operating temperature
PC safety instruction
PC safety
FT52422EN02GLA1
3
4
4
6
11
12
13
16
17
18
18
18
18
19
20
Safety instructions
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
Protective measures
Achtung!
Laser und Glasfaser
mechanisch nicht belasten
CAUTION
LASER AND GLASS FIBER
MUST NOT BE
PHYSICALLY DAMAGED
OR STRAINED
V
ESD
R
SE
LA
MAX
EQU IMUM
IP
WT. M EN T
28 K
G
S
AS
CL
oduct
Lase r P r
w
Class 3B
am or vie .
e
b
re into
ta
nts
s
e
t
m
o
u
n
tr
o
s
D
pti cal in
o
h
it
w
cal loop
dire ctly
lose d opti
c
a
in
te
Opera
only.
UNE
QU I
PP
WT.
12 K
ED
Fig. 1
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
Any installation, adjustment, maintenance or repair of the apparatus must only be

carried out by trained, authorized personnel. At all times, personnel must comply with
all safety notices and instructions.
Specific hazards are indicated by symbol labels on or near the affected parts of the
equipment. The labels conform to BS5378, are triangular in shape, and are colored
black on a yellow background. An informative text label may accompany the symbol
label.
Hazard labeling is supplemented by safety notices in the appropriate handbook.
These notices contain additional information on the nature of the hazard and may
also specify precautions. The notices are categorized as either Warnings or Cautions
and are presented in the format shown below.
1.1
Protection from high voltages
When the power supply is involved, VDE 0105 (operation of power installations),
which describes the safety measures required, must be observed.
1.2
Protective grounding
Prior to connecting the external cabling to the system rack, the rack frame must be
grounded. This grounding must remain for as long as cables are connected externally
to the equipment.
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52422EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Safety instructions
1.3
1.3.1
Protection from escaping laser light

Laser classes
According to the safety provisions all laser products must be assigned to a Class
from 1 to 4 according to their hazard potential, labeled and fitted with the required
protective equipment. Currently two classification schemes, the old one shown in the
graphics and a new one are used simultaneously.
An instruction program, to be repeated annually, is recommended for persons who
use Class 3 A to 4 laser products. Laser safety officers competent in the field only
need to be appointed for Class 3B and 4 laser products, however. Unintentional
radiation emission must be prevented for Class 2 to 4 laser products. Class 2 or 3A
laser products in the service or work area must be clearly recognizable and
permanently labeled. Only qualified and trained employees should be assigned to
install, adjust and operate class 3A to 4 laser equipment.
Use of Class 2 and 3A lasers does not endanger the skin. An eye hazard may be
posed in the visible range of laser radiation if the blink reflex is suppressed and Class
2 or Class 3A laser beams are shone directly into the pupil at close range. In general
there can be an eye hazard if beams emitted from Class 3A lasers are viewed with
collecting optical instruments such as magnifying glasses, telescopes etc.
For the "new" laser classes, the following things have changed:
old class 3A has been split into the new classes 1M and 2M, i.e. these classes are
dangerous when viewed e.g. through a fiberscope.
new is class 3R, as being substantially higher than the 1M (5 times the radiation
power), but much less dangerous than class 3B
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
Fig. 2 Possible laser hazards
Fig. 3 Table of laser classes
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
1.3.2
1.3.2.1
Classes of equipment used

SDH equipment
Synchronous optical fiber systems contain laser equipment. In the case of operation
in a closed system, this equipment meets the safety level of Class 1 laser
equipment.
Devices and modules which carry one
of these signs are fitted with laser
equipment.
LASER CLASS 1
Transmission systems which are fitted with optical laser amplifier modules are assigned to
Danger Class 3A, taking into account foreseeable malfunctions. They are identified by the
following labeling of the amplifier modules:
Laser Klasse 3A Nicht in den Strahl
blicken, auch nicht mit optischen
Instrumenten, Sendebetrieb nur im
geschlossenen optischen System.
Class 3A Laser Product

Do not stare into beam or view directly
with optical instruments. Operate in a
closed optical loop only.
Fig. 4
For safe operation of the whole optical section, activation of the laser safety
shutdown with blocking of the automatic cyclical laser startup is provided. Installation
must be done in a closed system with protection.
To avoid damage to health, the regulations on laser radiation safety (DIN VDE
0837/IEC 825) must be observed.
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
1.3.2.2
DWDM equipment
When operated in a closed system, the laser equipment of the device conforms to
class 1 safety level.
Within the device, hazard level 1M might occur.
Several Modules when open can belong to laser class 3 or even 4.
Labeling of the single modules is done accordingly.
Caution:
So that the Laser Class 1 (or 1M within the device) limits are met, it is not permitted
to carry out any mechanical modifications with the optical (laser) modules. If any
modification of these modules is realized or if the system is not operated according to
the regulations, the operating authorization will expire.
The laser radiation applied is invisible.
Nevertheless, in view of possible malfunctions, laser class 1 (or 1M within the device)
has to be notified. If the automatic laser shutdown APSD is disabled, laser class 3B
has to be notified.
Notwithstanding the above, any optical fiber cable which is open on one side should
be regarded as being in operation.
Never look into the end of a fiber, fiber connector, fiber patchcoard, fiber pigtail or
plug-in module connector until you are SURE that no light is present. Permanent eye
damage or blindness can result if exposed to such optical power levels, even for
extremely short durations. Always use whatever safety devices are supplied (caps,
shutters, etc.). Read and follow all laser warning labels affixed to the device.
Fig. 5 Warning labels on DWDM equipment
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
10
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
Handling
FT52422EN02GLA1
11
Safety instructions
2.1
Handling of modules with electrostatic sensitive

devices
All modules contain electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)!
Modules that bear this label have electrostatic sensitive devices, i.e. when handling them
the required safety measures must be configured with.
When modules with the electrostatic sensitive device symbol are packed, unpacked,
touched, extracted or inserted, grounding bracelets must always be worn. This ensures
that the modules are not damaged.
ESD
For this purpose, there are two appropriately marked grounding sockets
on the rack, that accommodate the connecting plug of the grounding
bracelet.
Fig. 6
Every printed circuit board has a grounding outer edge, which is connected to the
ground of the module, by which the board can be held. Touching the component
terminals, the contacts of the SIEDECON plug connector or the conductor tracks
(even if you are grounded correctly) must be avoided.
When modules are removed and inserted while installation and maintenance work is
being carried out, the insertion and extraction aids fitted to them must be used.
Modules which are in a screened, unopened housing are protected in any case.
European Standard EN50082-1 gives guidelines for appropriate handling of electorstatic sensitive devices.
No special rules must be observed when handling sub-racks.
There is danger of injury when the cover of the sub-rack is open. For this reason,
while working on the sub-rack, the sub-rack cover must be lifted in the open state and
then removed.
On completion, this cover must be replaced and closed.
12
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
2.2
Handling optical fiber connectors and lines
Optical connectors are precision parts and must be handled accordingly. Perfect
function is only ensured if the following points are observed:
Optical fiber connectors must always be protected from mechanical damage and
dirt by a protective cap. The dust protection caps should only be removed
immediately before fitting.
After the dust protection caps are removed, the faces of the optical fiber plugs
must be checked for cleanliness and cleaned if necessary. For cleaning, the
optical fiber cleaning tool C52334-A380-A926 or a perfectly clean, lint-free
cellulose cloth or chamois leather can be used. Freon TF, isopropyl alcohol (99%)
or spirit can be used as the cleaning fluid.
Mechanical damage to the faces of optical connectors reduces transmission
quality (increases attenuation), impact stresses must therefore be avoided when

handling the connectors.
Optical fiber lines must never be bent to a radius of less than 30 mm!
Achtung!
Laser und Glasfaser
Follow instructions about mechanical handling of lasers
mechanisch nicht belasten
CAUTION
and optical fibers on the optical modules.
LASER AND GLASS FIBER
MUST NOT BE PHYSICALLY
DAMAGED OR STRAINED
Fig. 7
FT52422EN02GLA1
13
Safety instructions
2.2.1
Cleaning of fibers
Once the protective dust caps have been removed or if a fiber connection was
opened, you must check under high magnification the surfaces of the optical fiber
connectors to ensure that they are clean, and clean them if necessary. Also do this
with increased optical attenuation.
The importance of clean fiber ends and connectors cannot be overemphasized.
NEVER make any fiber connection until the mating components are first cleaned, and
cleanliness is verified under magnification. Failure to do so will most likely result in
irreversible damage to fiber and/or connectors, necessitating their replacement.
Burnt-in dust particles also burn the transition area of a clean mating connector
("optical virus"). This is especially important when changing modules.
2.2.2
Fiber endface inspection criteria after cleaning
The fiber ends can be regarded as properly cleaned, when the following criteria are
fulfilled (valid for fibers with a radius of R = 125 m)
1. The 25 m Area (area up to 25 m which also includes the 9 m Core Glass
Area) must not have any visible scratches, impurities, or other damage.
2. In the Cladding Glass Area (R = 25-100 m) at least the inner 50% must be
completely free of scratches, impurities, or other damage. The other 50% must
fulfill the following criteria: They must not have any scratches which are
significantly broader or deeper than 1 m. Impurities of up to 10 m are,
tolerated, however the glass must not be chipped under any circumstances.
3. In the Overclad Area of the fiber (beyond a range of 100 m), isolated rough
scratches, impurities and chipped edges are tolerated up to 15 m.
All impurities must be easily removable.
In the pictures some examples are given for acceptable and unacceptable fiber
endfaces.
14
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
Fig. 8 Fiber endface structure
Fig. 9 Endface examples
FT52422EN02GLA1
15
Safety instructions
2.3
Handling batteries
To avoid loss of data, replacement of the battery must be handled by the

manufacturer. Therefore the module (e.g. system controller unit) has to be removed
as described in the MMN manual and sent in a special cover (ESD protection) to the
manufacturer.
The lithium battery on the module must be replaced with an identical type or one
recommended by the manufacturer.
If it is replaced incorrectly, there is danger of explosion.
The lithium battery must be disposed of according to the local regulations for disposal
of special waste.
16
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
Notes
FT52422EN02GLA1
17
Safety instructions
3.1
Notes on operating the device
The device must only be operated with the cover closed.
3.2
Notes on working on the subracks
There is danger of injury when the cover of the subrack is open. For this reason,
while working on the subrack, the subrack cover must be lifted in the open state and
then removed. On completion, the subrack cover must be replaced and closed.
3.3
Weight information
MAXIMUM
EQUIPMENT
WT. 23.4 KG
UNEQUIPPED
WT. 13.2 KG
Note the weight data given in subrack label.

Maximum safe lifting weight for one person
= 18 kg.
subrack empty weight = 13.2 kg
subrack full weight = 23.4 kg
The weight shown in kilograms is only
approximate.
Fig. 10
3.4
Parts with high operating temperature

Certain parts (e.g. heat sinks) operate at a high temperature. You
can get injured when touching these parts!
Caution When the subrack cover is opened these parts are
accessible!
Fig. 11
18
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
PC safety instruction
Fig. 12
FT52422EN02GLA1
19
Safety instructions
4.1
PC safety
Transport the device only in its original packaging, or equivalent, to protect it from
knocks and jolts.
During installation and before operating the device, observe any instructions on
environmental conditions in the Operating manual of the device.
If the device is brought into the installation site from a cold environment,
condensation can form. Before operating the device, wait until it is absolutely dry
and has reached approximately the same temperature as the installation site.
Ensure that the local line voltage remains within the range of this device. Check
the rated voltage set for this device (see the Operating Manual and type plate of
the device).
The device has a specially approved power cable and must only be connected to a
grounded wall outlet.
Ensure that the power socket on the device or the grounded wall outlet is freely
accessible.
The power switch does not disconnect the device from the line voltage. To
disconnect the line voltage completely, remove the power plug from the grounded
power outlet (see also the Operating Manual of the device).
Connect the device and the attached peripherals to the same circuit.
Lay all cables so that nobody can stand on them or trip over them. Refer to the
relevant notes in the Operating Manual when connecting the device.
No data transmission cable should be connected or disconnected during a

thunderstorm.
Please ensure that no objects or liquids can get into the interior of the device
(electrical shock, short circuit).
In emergency cases (e.g., damaged casing, elements or cables, penetration of

liquids or foreign matter), switch off the device immediately, remove the power
connector and contact your sales office or customer service.
Only qualified technicians may repair the device. Unauthorized repair may
represent a serious hazard to the user (electric shock, fire risk).
Proper operation of the device (in accordance with IEC 950/EN60950) is only
ensured if the casing is completely assembled and the rear covers are in place
(electric shock, cooling, fire protection, interference suppression).
When cleaning the device, observe the relevant notes in the Operating Manual.
20
FT52422EN02GLA1
Safety instructions
Before opening the device, first switch it off and then disconnect the power plug.
When opening the device observe the instructions in the associated Operating
Manual or Technical Manual. Install only system expansions that satisfy the
requirements and rules governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility and
relationing to telecommunications terminal equipment. If you install other
expansions, you may damage the system or violate the safety regulations and
regulations governing RFI suppression. Information on which system expansions
are suitable can be obtained from the customer service or your sales office. The
components (e.g. power supply) marked with a warning sign (e.g. lightning sign)
may only be opened, removed or exchanged by authorized, qualified personnel.
The warranty is voided if the device is damaged during the installation or

replacement of system expansions.
You may set only those resolutions and refresh rates specified in the "Technical
data" section of the monitor description. Otherwise you may damage your monitor.
Batteries must only be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning

special waste.
Data cables to peripheral devices must be adequately shielded.

WARNING
Incorrect replacement of the device's battery may lead to a risk of explosion.
The battery may be replaced only with an identical battery or with a type
recommended by the manufacturer.
4.1.1
CE certificate
The PC complies with the requirements of the EEC directive 89/336/EEC

Electromagnetic compatibility and 73/23/EEC Low voltage directive with amending
directive 93/67/EEC.
4.1.2
Notes on the laser
The following applies if your PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM drive contains an LED (light emitting diode) classified according to IEC
825-1:1993: LASER CLASE 1.
FT52422EN02GLA1
21
Safety instructions
22
FT52422EN02GLA1
Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2
2.1
3
3.1
3.2
Introduction to the equipment

An introduction to the converged network
Transport layers: efficiency of convergence
SURPASS next generation optics
SURPASS multi-service optical networks
What is next generation SDH?
SURPASS hiT 70xx product portfolio overview
Network applications
System manuals
Documentation overview
Hardware design and functionality
Hardware design
Functionality
FT52423EN02GLA1
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
26
31
32
35
36
44
FT52423EN02GLA1
Introduction to the equipment
Why is
NGDiffServ?
SDH?
What
Fig. 1
FT52423EN02GLA1
1.1
An introduction to the converged network
New World of Communications Services

Its a whole new world of communications services, and that world is packet based.
The legacy model, in which voice, video, and data are delivered separately over
dedicated, single purpose networks, no longer meets the needs of 21st century
businesses. Todays businesses require more dynamic services; and they need
versatile computing platforms and real-time, interactive applications to support their
new, business critical needs. As time goes on, it is increasingly clear that the legacy
model is just not up to it.
IP Infrastructure
Instead business needs are being increasingly supported by a next-generation
network that manages diverse traffic types within the context of a converged service
in which voice, data, and video coexist on a single, shared facility.
This converged network supports all of the users traffic types with packet-based
protocols such as ATM, Frame Relay, or IP. Of these, the dominant protocol in the
access, edge, and core of the network is the Internet Protocol (IP). A managed IP
infrastructure for both voice and data transmission is a concept that has begun to
revolutionize the industry. It leverages the Internet so that enhanced services can be
offered at lower costs, and it is motivating the development of a family of dynamic,
next generation, real time applications.
Different Characteristics of Voice and Data Traffic
As most people recognize, voice and data traffic have significantly different
characteristics and are difficult to reconcile within a single network. Data traffic tends
to be bursty, consuming large volumes of bandwidth for occasional, short intervals
whereas voice traffic is predictable and requires a steady, low-delay, transmission
path from end to end.
TIP
Existing Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) circuit-based networks were originally
designed to carry these predictable streams of voice traffic but do not efficiently
support bursty data traffic.
FT52423EN02GLA1
Change in Infrastructure
With data growth now outpacing voice, service providers face the challenge of
shedding inefficient TDM infrastructures while preserving the integrity and quality of
private-line and voice traffic. This change is leading to a gradual replacement of the
existing circuit switched infrastructure with new packet-based equipment.
Two additional factors provide an even more compelling need for service providers to
speed up their infrastructure conversion:
Deregulation and competition between incumbent and new service providers

The worldwide explosion in mobile communications
Next Generation Network Architecture

SURPASS
Next Generation
Management
NGN Management
NGN Control
SURPASS
Next Generation
Switching
NGN Control
Media
Gateways
Application/Video Servers
PSTN/
Mobile Network
NGN Core
SURPASS
Next Generation
Optics
IP/Optical
Backbone
NGN Access
Media
Gateway
Triple Play
Voice, Video, Data
Residential Customers
Access
Gateway
Metro
Optics
Multi-Service
Access
CPE
PBX
LAN
SURPASS
Next Generation
Access
Business Customers
Fig. 2 Next Generation Architecture
FT52423EN02GLA1
1.2
Transport layers: efficiency of convergence
The transport network need not only be flexible, scalable, and manageable but also
at the same time be open and transparent to the types of client services supported. In
that sense the transport network is a point of convergence for the various type of
services (voice, leased lines, data, and internet) offered by a network operator and
should be transparent to the client service type and flexible to the growth of particular
service types and the traffic mix that may result.
This can only be achieved through a layered network approach where a product with
specific attributes is deployed to specifically address the requirements of the client
services in that domain. A layered structure on of the transport network is a
consequence of the worldwide drive to more efficient networking measured through
cost per switched unit parameter.
Triggered by the universal application and deployment of IP technology, the
traditional border between enterprise and public communications has been blurred
and is slowly disappearing. IP-based applications and the deployment of IP
technology not only established the basis for greater transmission speeds but also
increased the demand for new communication services. Yesterdays focus on
transmission was purely on circuit provisioning with SDH and DWDM. Data world
was based purely on connectionless Ethernet switching and IP routing.
However, the trend in data services, stretching out of the local area into the metro
and regional transmission domain, is changing the requirements for switching and
routing platforms, for example with the introduction of protocols and mechanisms for
traffic separation and circuit orientation (VLAN technology and MPLS). Transmission
networks and systems are therefore also evolving to include mapping of multiple
service and signal types into the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy as well as multipoint
connectivity and statistical multiplexing for enhanced traffic concentration.
As a result, in order to reduce costs for network operators, tomorrows transmission
networks must efficiently manage both types of services provisioned point-to-point
circuits and switched multi-point data services simultaneously in one platform.
Having only one converged network managing both traffic types reduces investment.
This ultimately leads to fewer optical interfaces and, in addition, lowers operational
expenditures.
SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks meets the demand of a complete IPoptimized solution for regional and metropolitan areas. Data and Ethernet functions
plus integrated Storage Area Network capabilities are added to the full set of classic
transport features for TDM services. Both the existing and the new services are
managed with one single network and service management system, the TNMS
Telecommunication Network Management System.
FT52423EN02GLA1
Transport Layers: Efficiency of Convergence

Data/Internet
Voice
Leased Lines
National / Long Distance Layer

Broadband SDH / DWDM
Key objectives:
Growth & traffic mix
Layered
Transport
Network
Regional / Metropolitan Layer

Broadband SDH / DWDM
Flexibility and scalability

Service differentiation
Switch
Operational Efficiency
Local / Access Layer

Wideband SDH
Fig. 3 Transport Layers: Efficiency of Convergence
SURPASS NG Optics: Customer Benefits

Backbone
Reduced cost of bit/km with a transparent DWDM network
Regional/
Metro Core
Multi-Service Provisioning Platform
Metro
Access/Edge
Up to 40% CAPEX savings due to modular design, multi service

capability (Ethernet, TDM, SAN), high port density
Up to 30% OPEX savings due to plug and play feature, one network
management system, family concept/spare parts reduction, fast
service provisioning
New profitable services for business customers
SAN: Storage Area Networks
POTS, ISDN, xDSL
Mobile
Enterprise ( Data,Voice, SAN)
Other carrier
Fig. 4 Transport Layers: Portfolio Overview
FT52423EN02GLA1
1.3
SURPASS next generation optics
The solutions for Next Generation Optics include optical backbone, metro core and
metro edge networks. It guarantees top reliability, multi-service aggregation and longhaul transportation.
Its scalability, intelligent networking functionality and centralized network
management ensures streamlined operations and fast provisioning of customer
specific bandwidth and services.
SURPASS Next Generation Optics include revenue generating multi-service
transport solutions with lowest networking costs:
SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks

SURPASS Transparent Optical Networks
SDH and DWDM - complete and future proof network from the edge to the
backbone
Intelligent Switching Platform (Sycamore SN16000)

TNMS - Best-in-class network management for optical networks: MultiVendor and Multi-Technology management;
Enterprise VPN
FT52423EN02GLA1
SURPASS Next Generation Optics
Multi-Service
Optical Networks
Transparent
Optical Networks
Telecommunication
Network
Management
System
Fig. 5 SURPASS Next Generation Optics
Summary: Next Generation Optics

TNMS-C
SURPAS S hiT
Trans parent Optical Networks
Backbone/
Regional
SURPASS
hiT 7500/7300
Regional/
Metro Core
Metro
WDM
S URPASS hiT
FSP
Multi Se rv ice
Optic al
Networks
S DH / ne xt-gen. SDH
SL, SMA,
SX
SURPASS hiT
7080/70/60/ HC
ISP
ISP
POP
POP
Metro
Access/Edge
SDH
CPE
next-gen.
S DH
SURPASS hiT
7050/35/30
GbE
SL, SMA,
GbE
Business
Customer
CPE
Enterprise
(storage area netw.)
NAS
SURPASS hiT
7030/25/20/CPE
CPE
Fig. 6 Summary: Next Generation Optics
FT52423EN02GLA1
1.4
SURPASS multi-service optical networks
The complete family of SURPASS hiT 70 series Multi-Service Provisioning Platforms

allows building new and extending existing metro and regional transport networks.
With SURPASS hiT 70 series IP-optimized transport networks can be built, with data
and Ethernet functions being added to the classical transport features.
It also is the key to full featured multi-service access for corporate customers.
SURPASS hiT 70 series customer premises equipment (CPE) delivers multiple
services for telephony, Ethernet connectivity e.g. intranet meshing, business video
applications, storage area networking (SAN) and Internet access applications. Such
flexibility is necessary to be able to offer each customer both business class and
economy class types of services. To guarantee the quality of service, SDH
technology is used to securely separate the different traffic streams.
There are a number of compelling reasons why SURPASS Multi-Service Optical
Networks is the perfect answer to the challenges carriers face in the evolution of their
metro and regional platforms:
Multi-Service Provisioning supports both classic leased lines and new, switched
Ethernet services simultaneously on one common minimum-cost platform.
Existing Investment is safeguarded since utilization of the existing network
infrastructure is vastly improved by applying standard technology for IP-optimized

transport solutions without affecting legacy solutions.
Supplying new, profitable services that explicitly meet the growing demands of
corporate customers, increases revenue. Carrier-grade quality of service is

maintained for both existing and new services while building future-proof flexibility
into the network.
Blending transmission and switching technologies in a common minimum-cost
platform, as opposed to pure packet solutions, reduce investment and Operational

Costs.
Plug & Play Commissioning in SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Network solutions,

a comprehensive set of plug & play features, including automatic card detection
and topology discovery, simplifies operations dramatically, thus reducing
operational expenditures.
Operation is optimized with TNMS, the Siemens network management solution

that provides centralized control and supervision of the entire optical network.
10
FT52423EN02GLA1
SURPASS Multi Service Optical Networks
Use
Use of
of existing
existing technology
technology and
and installed
installed SDH
SDH base
base
Network
Convergence
with
lowest
OPEX
and
Network Convergence with lowest OPEX and
minimum
minimum additional
additional Capital
Capital Expenditures
Expenditures (CAPEX)
(CAPEX)
One
One Platform
Platform for
for Ethernet,
Ethernet, TDM,
TDM, WDM
WDM and
and SAN
SAN
Next Gen.
SDH
Carrier-grade
Ethernet
Service
transparency
TNMS
Configuration
Tool
Multi-Service
Provisioning
Platform
TNMS
TNMS
Fig. 7 SURPASS Multi Service Optical Networks
SURPASS Multi
Multi Service Optical Networking
Networking
SDH
SD H migrates
migrates to metro/edge
metro/edge
The metro access
access networks consolidate
consolidate Voice, Data, Legacy services,
Leased
Leased lines...
lines...
SDH
SD H evolves to MSPP (Ethernet/TDM/SAN
(Ethernet/T DM/SAN over SDH)
SDH )
Ethernet
Ethernet Layer
Layer 2 functionalities brings an optimal
optimal and intelligent way
way to
transport and handle
handle triple
triple play traffic
traffic over one
one single network
network
Ethernet
/SONET networks
Ethernet over SDH
SDH builds on installed base
base of
of SDH
SDH/SONET
to preserve investment in
in installed base and know-how
Next Gen SDH = Multi - Service Provisioning Platform

Fig. 8 SURPASS Multi Service Optical Networking
FT52423EN02GLA1
11
1.5
What is next generation SDH?
What exactly is a Next-Generation SDH solution? A basic definition is:
NG SDH solutions must enable real significant savings in CAPEX and OPEX
compared to legacy SDH.
NG SDH solutions like SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks achieve these

improvements by:
Decreasing Footprint
Improving Scalability and Flexibility (Any Size/ Any Service Mix)
Increasing Port Density
Integrated VC-4/VC-12 Switching Fabrics (Switching Cards)
Use of new technologies like Generic Framing procedure (GFP), Virtual
Concatenation and Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) allow for:

- Efficient support of data applications (Ethernet, SAN)
- Offering granularity of bandwidth
- Improved network utilization and efficiency
- Fast/flexible bandwidth and service provisioning capabilities
12
FT52423EN02GLA1
What is Next-Generation SDH?

NG SDH solutions must enable real significant savings in
CAPEX and OPEX compared to legacy SDH!
NG SDH Solutions like SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks achieve this
improvements by:
Decreasing Footprint
Improving Scalability and Flexibility (Any Size/Any Service Mix)
Increasing Port Density
Integrated VC4/VC12 Switching Fabrics
Use of new technologies like GFP, VC and LCAS which allow for:
Efficient support of data applications (Ethernet, SAN)
Offering granularity of bandwidth
Improved network utilization and efficiency
Fast/flexible bandwidth and service provisioning capabilities
Fig. 9 What is Next Generation SDH?
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
1.6
SURPASS hiT 70xx product portfolio overview
SURPASS hiT 70xx NEs are SDH based Multi Service Provisioning Platforms
(MSPP). The product family is reaching from high end multiple ADM64 to MultiService Customer Premises Equipment:
SURPASS hiT 7080

SURPASS hiT 7070
SURPASS hiT 7060 / (HC)
SURPASS hiT 7050
SURPASS hiT 7035
SURPASS hiT 7030
SURPASS hiT 7025
SURPASS hiT 7020
SURPASS certified CPEs
14
FT52423EN02GLA1
NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Portfolio

Portfolio benefits
New
Ne twork a pplication s from CP E to

Metro Core
Ne twork re liability and scalabil ity
TDM servi ces
ASTN/GMPLS functi on ality
hiT 7070
Optimized product fit for every use case

Ethernet se rvices incl. L2
Seamless in terworking with C/DWDM
hiT 7050
hiT 7080
hiT 7025
hiT 7060
New
New
hiT 7030
hiT 7035
hiT 7020
Fig. 10 NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Portfolio
hiT 7080
HE CC/ADM, multiple STM-64
hiT 7070 SC / DC
ADM / CC, multiple STM-64
hiT 7060 HC
ADM-64, multiple STM-16
hiT 7060
ADM, multiple STM-16
hiT 7050 CC
ADM-16
hiT 7035
ADM-16/-4
hiT 7025
ADM-16/-4/-1
hiT 7050 FP1
ADM-4 modular
hiT 7030
ADM-4/-1 modular
hiT 7020
ADM-4/-1 single board
TNMS Netmanagement
Application
no
redundancy
Product
full
redundancy
NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Overview
Fig. 11 NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Overview
FT52423EN02GLA1
15
SURPASS hiT 7080

SURPASS hiT7080 is a powerful core network product suitable for being deployed in
metro and regional area with combined SDH, Layer 2 switching, ASON/GMPLS, OTN
and WDM functionalities. It is equipped with a 340G VC-4 switching fabric specifically
targeted for handling large amounts of GE, 10GE, and STM-64 traffic and can
interface directly with DWDM systems. SURPASS hiT 7080 provides 20G (128 x 128
VC-4 equivalents) or 40G (256 x 256 VC-4s equivalents) Low order (VC-3/VC-12
granularity) matrix capability.
SURPASS hiT 7070

This Next Generation Multi-Service Provisioning Platform is a single cost-effective
transport platform that is optimized for both bursty packet and traditional narrowband
and wideband voice traffic. This solution offers the highest degree in flexibility and
scalability (any size for any service mix), quick service provisioning and new revenuerich services. It offers non-blocking 160G@VC-4 and multiple 10G@VC-3/VC-12
switching granularity as well as RPR packet fabric @2G5 and WDM operation.
SURPASS hiT 7070 is operating at the STM-16 and/or STM-64 levels.
16
FT52423EN02GLA1
hiT 7080: Executive Feature Summary

Multi Service Platform for PDH, SDH, WDM and Data
Integration
hiT 7080: 340G@VC-4 and 40G@VC-12 / VC-3 Switching

Granularity
Packet fabrics (RPR)
Extended P2P and L2 Ethernet functionalities
Integrated STM-16 DWDM Interfaces for direct

interworking with hiT 7300 and FSP3000
Extensive protection features (HW, SNCP, MSP 1+1/1:N,

2F MS-SPRing, DNI)
GMPLS/ASON based restoration
Extension Shelf solutions (SURPASS hit 7035)
Fig. 12 SURPASS hiT 7080: Executive Feature Summary

160 Gb/s HO + 4x 10 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity
TDM Interfaces: 2M/34M/45M/STM-1/-4/-16/-64
Eth/FE/GbE/10GbE @ p2p/p2mp/mp2mp
Transparent Services over WDM
1+1, 1:1, 1:N MSP, SNCP and 2F/4F MS-SPRing
EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS
L2 Service Multiplexer and L2 Switch
GMPLS/ASON based restoration
Integrated @ TNMS Core
FT52423EN02GLA1
17
SURPASS hiT 7060 HC

This Next Generation Multi-Service Provisioning Platform integrates transport,
access, and switching functions into one powerful and cost effective unit and is
designed for metro aggregation network applications. SURPASS hiT 7060 HC
employs an innovative dual TDM/Data plane design, with large SDH high-order
cross-connect capacity (70G) and substantial low-order cross connect (5G) capacity.
Integrated operation of NE with the extension shelf SURPASS hiT 7035 is supported.
Data L2 services can be provided via L2 switch and/or RPR modules. SURPASS hiT
7060 HC is operating at the STM-16 and/or STM-64 levels.
SURPASS hiT 7060

This Next Generation Multi-Service Provisioning Platform integrates transport, access
and switching functions into one powerful and cost effective unit and is designed for
Metro aggregation network applications.
From de cross connection capacity point of view, there are two variant. For releases
3.x the capacity is 70G for High Order cross connections (VC-4) and 5G for Low
Order cross connections (VC-3 and VC-12). For releases 4.x the cross connection
capacity is 25G for High Order and 10G for Low Order.
VC-4 Matrix
VC-3/-12Matrix
Matrix
70G
70Gbps (448 x 448 VC-4s) non

blocking
5Gbps (2016 x 2016 VC-12s) non

blocking
Matrix
25G
25Gbps (160 x 160 VC-4s) non

blocking
10Gbps (4032 x 4032 VC-12s) non

blocking
Integrated operation of NE with the extension shelf SURPASS hiT 7035 is supported.
Data L2 services can be provided via L2 switch and/or RPR modules. SURPASS hiT
7060 is operating at the STM-16 level.
18
FT52423EN02GLA1
hiT 7060 HC: Executive Feature Summary

70 Gb/s HO + 5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity
within a single switching fabric
TDM Interfaces: 2M/34M/45M/STM-1/-4/-16/-64
Eth/FE/GBE @ p2p/p2mp/mp2mp
L2 switch / aggregation / RPR / ESR
1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing @STM-64/-16/-4
HW protection: controller, matrix, power
Fig. 14 SURPASS hiT 7060 HC: Executive Feature Summary

within a single switching fabric
including STM-16/STM-4 IF
TDM Interfaces: 2M/34M/45M/STM-1/4/16
1:N Card PDH Card Protection
Layer 2 switching and aggregation/RPR/RSTP
1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-16
Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core
FT52423EN02GLA1
19
SURPASS hiT 7050

SURPASS hiT 7050 is a modular system designed for applications at customer
premises and the metro access layer. The equipment itself is designed to provide a
cost effective and flexible multi-service network node or termination. SURPASS hiT
7050 supports PDH, SDH and Ethernet signals at various bit-rates. The switching
fabric is able to aggregate; groom and cross connect traffic without restrictions, from
VC-4 down to VC-12 level. Furthermore it is even possible to enhance the
functionality by simply plugging a packet switching fabric to the basic configuration.
The following variants exist:
SURPASS hiT 7050 FP1 (FlatPack 1) with a switching capacity of 32 x 32 STM-1

(5G)
SURPASS hiT 7050 CC (CompactCore) with a switching capacity of 64 x 64 STM1 (10G) and enhanced availability
All can be equipped with 2 different trunk port types:

SURPASS hiT 7050 FP1 with STM-1 or STM-4 uplink capacity
SURPASS hiT 7050 CC with STM-4 or STM-16 uplink capacity
SURPASS hiT 7035

SURPASS hiT 7035 in its first release is used as extension shelf for hiT 7060, hiT
7060 HC and hiT 7080 to extend the number of 2 Mbit/s interfaces which can be
supported by one NE. The NE is available also as standalone ADMX.
The SURPASS hiT 7035 can operate using two kinds of matrix cards:
1. CC + one STM-16/-4 card:
High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC): 15 Gbps (98 x 98 VC-4s)

Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC): 5 Gbps (2016 x 2016 VC-12s)
2. CC + one STM-4/-1 card:
High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC): 7.2 Gbps (46 x 46 VC-4s)

Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC): 2.5 Gbps (1008 x 1008 VC-12s)
20
FT52423EN02GLA1

5G and 10G@VC-12 Switching Granularity
MSPP for PDH, SDH and Ethernet Services:
2/34/45Mbps, STM-1/-4/-16, 10/100BaseT, GbE
1:N 2Mbps Card PDH Card Protection
Layer 2 switching and aggregation
Integrated @ TNMS Core

7.2G HO + 2.5G LO Switching Capacity
15G HO + 5G LO Switching Capacity
Can be used as Extension Shelf for
hiT 7080/7060HC/7060
ATM-IMA aggregation for mobile networks
Layer 2 switching
1:N; 1+1 MSP; SNCP; MS-SPRing for STM-4/16 and DNI
FT52423EN02GLA1
21
SURPASS hiT 7030

SURPASS hiT 7030 integrates transport, access and switching into one compact,
efficient platform and is designed to satisfy medium or low capacity metro multiservices access requirements for service provider or private enterprise networks. In
addition to traditional PDH and SDH interfaces, it provides a rich and diversified set
of client data interfaces including L2 switching capabilities. SURPASS hiT 7030 is
operating at the STM-1 or STM-4 levels and has:
SDH high-order cross-connect capacity of 16 x 16 VC-4s (2,5G)

SDH low-order cross connect capacity of 1008 x 1008 VC-12s.
SURPASS hiT 7025
SURPASS hiT 7025 is a compact and integrated STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 system
positioned for Metro Access applications. In addition to traditional PDH and SDH
interfaces, it provides a rich and diversified set of client data interfaces including L2
switching capabilities.
SURPASS hiT 7025 handle two matrix cards. One of them, handle in the faceplate of
the card, one operating at the STM-1 or STM-4 port:
High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC) capacity of 46 x 46 VC-4s (7G)

Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC) capacity of 1008 x 1008 VC-12s (2,5G).
Alternatively version SURPASS hiT 7025 is also available operating at the STM-4 or
STM-16 levels with:
High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC) capacity of 98 x 98 VC-4s (15 G)

Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC) capacity of 2016 x 2016 VC-12s (5G)
22
FT52423EN02GLA1
STM-1 or STM-4 uplink included on mainboard

MSPP for PDH, SDH and Ethernet Services
slim-line chassis 2 HU

7 Gb/s HO Switching Capacity and
2,5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity with STM-1/-4 I/F
15 Gb/s HO Switching Capacity and
5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity with STM-4/-16 I/F
MSPP for PDH, SDH and Ethernet Services
E1, E3/DS3, STM-1e Card Protection
1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-4/16
FT52423EN02GLA1
23
SURPASS hiT 7020

SURPASS hiT 7020 is a very compact and integrated STM-1/STM-4 system
positioned for Metro Access applications. SURPASS hiT 7020 supports data (FE)
and PDH (E1) traffic. The system can be ordered in various system configurations
(AC or DC power supply, E1 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm) as listed in the table below:
System
Configuration
LOCC (VC-4
equivalent)
SDH Line
Interface
E1 ports
FE ports
A (Rel. 3.1)
44
2 STM-1
B (Rel. 3.1)
44
2 STM-1
4 FE/L2
C (Rel. 3.2)
44
2 STM-1
4 x FE/T
D (Rel. 3.2)
16 16
2 STM-1/4
E (Rel. 3.2)
16 16
2 STM-1/4
4 FE/L2
F (Rel. 3.2)
16 16
2 STM-1/4
4 x FE/T
Table - System Configuration

SURPASS hiT 7020 is designed to satisfy medium or low capacity metro multiservices access requirements for service provider or private enterprise networks.
SURPASS certified CPE's:
SURPASS certified CPE's are cost-optimized, ultra-compact multi-service CPEs with
application specific design that are completing the SURPASS hiT 70xx series.
FSP 1500 Broadband CPE: Broadband CPE equipment for E1, FE, GbE, Fiber
Channel and FICON services with optionally redundant STM-16 or STM-4 Uplink
24
FT52423EN02GLA1

STM-1 or STM-4 uplink included on mainboard
MSPP for E1 and Ethernet Services
DC Power Supply
slim-line chassis
Optional Layer 2 switching
AC Power Supply
SURPASS certified CPE Solutions
Ultra
Ultracompact
compactBroadband
BroadbandCPE
CPEfor
for
Ethernet,
SAN
and
TDM
Ethernet, SAN and TDM
SDH
SDHredundant
redundantuplink
uplink(STM-16/-4)
(STM-16/-4)offers
offers
QoS
QoSand
andhighest
highestreliability
reliability
GFP-F
GFP-Fand
andGFP-T
GFP-Tmapping
mappingsupport
support
Use
of
SFP
modules
Use of SFP modulesfor
forall
alloptical
opticalI/F
I/F
Single
Singleboard
boarddesign
design
19
19and
andETSI
ETSIrack
rackmounting
mounting
Desktop
and
wall
mounting option
Desktop
FSP and
1500 wall mounting option
AC
ACand
andDC
DCpowering
poweringoption
option
Integrated
into
Integrated intoTNMS
TNMSCore
Core
Fig. 21 SURPASS certified CPE Solutions
FT52423EN02GLA1
25
1.7
Network applications
Terminal Multiplexer (TMX) in terminal-to-terminal topologies

The following figure illustrates a straightforward point-to-point network with one TMX
at the transmitting end and another at the receiving end.
At the TMX, the client equipment is connected to the TMX through the tributary
interfaces (This can be SDH, PDH or GFP based interfaces).
A single VC-4 switching matrix in SURPASS hiT 7080 Network Elements can
add/drop up to a total of 2176 x 2176 VC-4s equivalent at any station.
In addition, a VC-3/-12 switch fabric can also be cascaded with the existing VC-4
switch fabric, if lower order switching granularity is required. This functionality will
be available in the next release.
TIP
The use of MSP between the NE's is preferred for redundancy reasons but not
mandatory.
Add Drop Multiplexer (ADMX) in Linear and Ring Topologies with Add/drop
Function
Linear chains as well as rings are supported by SURPASS hiT 70xx series network
elements in add/drop equipment configuration.
An ADMX is normally used at an intermediate site to add/drop client traffic. In the
figure below, an ADMX is located in between two TMX's. At the ADMX, selected
traffic is add/drop either at VC-4 or VC-3/-12 levels, while through connected traffic is
transparently passed through.
Apart from that, if native Ethernet frame handling is required, then the ADMX can
also be equipped with GFP based traffic interfaces.
TIP
The use of MSP between the NE's is preferred for redundancy reasons but not
mandatory. In ring configurations MS-SPRing may be used for optional redundancy.
26
FT52423EN02GLA1
TMX and ADMX Application

TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic
TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic
Working Line
Protection Line
TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic
ADMX
TMX
Working
Line
Working
Line
Protection
Line
TDM/Data
Traffic
Protection
Line
TDM/Data
Traffic
Fig. 22 TMX and ADMX Application
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27
Local Cross Connect (LXC) in STAR Topologies

Typically, an operators network consists not only of a single ring but multiple rings,
with each ring covering different geographical boundary. SURPASS hiT 70xx series
can be deployed at the hub of the network as a LXC, routing transit traffic going from
one ring to another ring. With a fully 100 % non blocking switching fabric, any crossconnection between line to line, tributary to tributary, tributary to line or line to
tributary can be realized.
28
FT52423EN02GLA1
LXC Application
ADMX/TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic
ADMX/TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic
g
r k in
Wo ine
L
Wo
r ki
Lin ng
e
ADMX/TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic
Pr o
tect
Lin ion
e
g
i
k
r n
Wo ne
Li
n
tio
tec e
o
r
P Lin
Wo
r k in
Line g
LXC
tion
tec
Pro ine
L
ADMX/TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic
Pr o
tec
Lin tion
e
LXC
Fig. 23 LXC Scenario
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
30
FT52423EN02GLA1
System manuals
Fig. 24 System Manuals
FT52423EN02GLA1
31
2.1
The SURPASS hiT 7080 Customer Documentation comprises the following

descriptions and manuals:
Document
Product description (PD)
Installation and Test

Manual (ITMN)
Interconnect,
Configuration, and
Mechanical Assembly
(ICMA)
Overview of the entire system. Includes description of

features, components, NE types, operating theory,
block diagrams, plug-in card descriptions, and detailed
technical specifications.
Instructions for installing and cabling the equipment.
The ITMN also includes the post-installation
commissioning procedures.
Complete set of drawings that depict rack, subrack, and
plug-in card arrangements, as well as electrical and
fiber cabling plans.
Commissioning Manual
(COMN)
Instructions for commissioning a network element.
Safety Instructions
Instructions and rules for hardware safe handling.
Operating Manual (OMN)
Instructions on the Graphical User Interface of the Local

Craft Terminal (LCT).
Troubleshooting Manual
(TSMN)
Detailed information to troubleshoot and remedy alarm

events.
Open Source Licenses
32
Description
(OSL)
FT52423EN02GLA1
OSL
TS-MN
OMN
COMN
ICMA
ITMN
PD
Safety Instr.
Official documentation
Fig. 25 Official documentation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33
34
FT52423EN02GLA1
Hardware design and functionality
ENS
S IEM
Fig. 26
FT52423EN02GLA1
35
3.1
3.1.1
Hardware design
Rack Equipment of SURPASS hiT 7080
The equipment frames meet the ETS 300 119 - 2 requirements.

The racks are unshielded.
In order to minimize the rack spacing of the shelves, the outlets of the optical cables
are at the front of the rack beams. This means that the mounting plane of the rack is
moved to the back.
SURPASS hiT 7080 shall be accommodated in the following ETSI racks:
Standard ETSI Rack.

Nokia Siemens Networks ETSI Rack.
The standard ETSI rack is not recommended to be used because it has limited space
for cabling in the front of the cable duct. Nokia Siemens Networks ETSI rack is the
recommended rack.
The top-most rack slot is used for fitting a terminal panel which supplies equipment
with a DC voltage of 48 V or 60 V from the telecommunications center. The cables
are connected to the terminals at the top of the fuse panel. The power is fed from the
fuse panel to the sub rack(s) using the rack cabling. All electrical lines (connection
lines for the telecommunications center, cabling between the sub racks and the rack
terminal panel) as well as the FO lines will be routed using the upright rails of the
rack and are secured with cable ties.
36
FT52423EN02GLA1
Fig. 27 SURPASS hiT 7080 with or without extension shelf measurements
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37
3.1.2
SURPASS hiT 7080 subrack
The shelf is available with various types of mounting brackets for different rack types
(Standard ETSI, Nokia Siemens Networks ETSI). The shelf mechanical concept is
based on plug-in technique, front access of cards and cable connections.
Each shelf consists of:
Redundant DC Power I/O in the top section

Double row of card slots for installing 33 cards (15 upper row slots and 18 lower
row slots)
2 System Controller (SC) slots

1 System Interface (SI) slot
2 HOCC slots
19 Line Card (LC) traffic slots
9 I/O slots which can be flexibly configured for electrical interface I/O cards
Cable duct for orderly routing of the cables to and from the cards
Fiber duct for orderly routing of the fibers to and from the cards
Two fan units with three fans per unit to cool the system
Backplane with Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filter
Air filter to protect the electronics and optics from dust and other contaminants
Connector for the grounding of wrist straps
38
FT52423EN02GLA1
hiT 7080 Chassis Slots and Backplane Capacity

PWR IO
I
O
1
I
I
O O
2 3
I
O
4
H
S
S
/
I
E
1
19
20
22
23
21
H
S
/
E
1
H
S
/
E
1
H
S
/
E
1
Equipment Core slots

HS slots, 20G & LOCC slots
H
S I I I I I
/ O O O O O
E 5 6 7 8 9
1
24 25 26 27 28 29
30
31
32
HS slots, 20G backplane w.DS3/STM-1E

HS slots, 20G backplane
33
HS slots, 10G backplane w. E1/STM-1E
Fiber Space
HS slots, 20G backplane w. E1/STM-1E

H
S H H H H H H H
O
C S S S S S S S
C
C
H
H H
H H
O
S S
S S
C
/ /
C
E E
10
H
S
/
E
H
S
/
E
H
S
S
C
/
E
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
IO slots
Note: Italic numbers indicate INTERNAL slot numbers
HS
HS/E
HS/E1
HOCC
SC
PWR IO
18
Fiber Duct
Fan Tray
Fan Tray
Air Filter Tray
= High speed slot (20G)

= HS & also support DS3/STM-1E
= 10G High Speed & E1/STM-1E
= High Order Cross-Connect slot
= System Controller slot
= Power Supply slot
Fig. 28 hiT 7080 Chassis Slots and Backplane Capacity I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39
3.1.3
Available Card Types and Slot Compatibility
The table below lists the types of cards supported by hiT 7080 Rel. 4.15
Card type
Controller
Cross
connection
Card name
Description
SC
System control card for NE configuration
SI E
System Interface card with EOW
SI
System interface card without EOW
HOCC
LOCC
340 Gbps VC-4 switch fabric

2176 x 2176 VC-4 equivalents
20G VC-3 / VC-12 switch fabric
384 x 384 VC-3 / 16384 x 16384 VC-12
2 x STM-64
SDH
PDH
8 x STM-16
8 x STM-4/1
8 x STM-1 E
STM-1 electrical interface card
126 x E1
2 Mbps interface card, 126 x E1
12 x E3/DS3
34/45 Mbps interface card, 12 x E3/DS3
8 x GE / T
1 x 10GE/T
Ethernet
Optical Interface Card
Transparent Ethernet interface card
6 x GE + 4 FEGE/A
1 x 10 GE + 10 x
GE/L2
Layer 2 Ethernet interface card
RPR
2 x GE + 12 x FE/RPR
RPR Service interface card
OTN
1 x OUT - 2/UF
OTU interface card
POA (20 dB)
Pre amplifier card
OA
BOA (13 dBm)

BOA (15 dBm)
Boost amplifier card
BOA (18 dBm)
40
FT52423EN02GLA1
Cards
Slots number
Max
SC
1 and 18
SI / SI-E
23
HOCC
9 and 10
Notes
20 G capacity
6 (W); 7 (P)
40 G capacity
5 (W), 6 (W); 7(P), 8 (P)
2 x STM-64
2 to 8, 12 to 17, (24 to 27)* and 28
19
* Only port 2 can be used due

backplane capacity for these slots.
8 x STM-16
2 to 8, 12 to 17, (24 to 27)* and 28
19
* Only ports 5 to 8 can be used due

backplane capacity for these slots.
LOCC
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
No Protection
13 (W) 30 (I/O); 14 (W) 31 (I/O); 15 (W) 32 (I/O); 16 (W) 33 (I/O)

24 (W) 19 (I/O); 25 (W) 20 (I/O); 26 (W) 21 (I/O); 27 (W) 22 (I/O)
16
1:N Protection
[13 (W) - 30 (I/O); 14 (W) - 31 (I/O); 15 (W) - 32 (I/O); 16 (W) - 33 (I/O)] - 17 (P)
[24 (W) - 19 (I/O); 25 (W) - 20 (I/O); 26 (W) - 21 (I/O); 27 (W) - 22 (I/O)] - 28 (P)
18
8 x STM-4/-1
8 x STM-1 E +
8 x STM-1 E I/O
No protection
13 (W) 30 (I/O); 14 (W) 31 (I/O); 16 (W) 32 (I/O); 17 (W) 33 (I/O)
1:N Protection
[13 (W) - 30 (I/O); 14 (W) - 31 (I/O); 16 (W) - 32 (I/O); 17 (W) - 33 (I/O)] - 15 (P)
No Protection
24 (W) [19 + 20] (I/O); 25 (W) [21 + 22] (I/O); 27 (W) [29 + 30] (I/O); 28
(W) [31 + 32] (I/O)
12
1:N Protection
{24 (W) [19 + 20] (I/O); 25 (W) [21 + 22] (I/O); 27 (W) [29 + 30] (I/O); 28
(W) [31 + 32] (I/O)} 26 (P)
13
1 x 10 GE +
10 x GE / L2
5 + 6; 6 + 7; 7 + 8; 11 + 12; 12 + 13; 13 + 14
1 x 10 GE / T
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
8 x GE / T
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
6 x GE + 4 x FEGE/A
2 to 8, 12 to 14, 16, 17
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
1 x OTU-2/UF
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
OA
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
12 x E3/DS3 +
12 x E3/DS3 I/O
126 x E1 +
63 x E1 (I/O)
Interworking with Fujitsu DWDM

system; not for general availability
Fig. 29 Card Types and Slot Compatibility
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41
42
FT52423EN02GLA1
LOCC and E1 card protection group rules
Fig. 30 Card protection group rules I
E3/DS3 and STM-1e card protection group rules
Fig. 31 Card protection group rules II
FT52423EN02GLA1
43
3.2
3.2.1
Functionality
Overview
The SURPASS hiT 7080 as Next Generation SDH system comes with TDM and
packet switching fabrics. Due to the flexibility of the design, the hiT 7080 systems can
accommodate both VC-4 and VC-12 switching fabric within a single sub-rack.
By allowing different TDM fabrics to converge under one common platform,
SURPASS hiT 7080 is effectively transformed to a 10 Gbps system with scalable
switching granularity from VC-4 right down to VC-12.
In addition SURPASS hiT 7080 can also be equipped with L2 switch cards. It
switches the frames to its destination port based on the VLAN and Ethernet MAC
address.
3.2.2
Block Diagram
The hiT 7080 basic architecture is shown in the block diagram (see Fig. 32).
The system is composed of:
Core Functionalities
SDH Functionalities
Ethernet Functionalities
PDH Functionalities
3.2.3
System Core
The core configuration consists of the following units:
Chassis and backplane (including Power I/O at the top)

Redundant Fan Units and a Filter Unit at the bottom
Redundant System Control (SC) board
System Interface (SI E) board
Redundant HOCC board
44
FT52423EN02GLA1
SURPASS hiT 7080 Block Diagram

System Core
20G
LOCC
MGT-1/2
MDO/MDI
User Channels
ALM
EOW
EXT-1..4 (res.)
System
Clock
Unit
SI-E
System
Interface
340G
VC-3/12
Switch
T4-1/2
T3 1/2
20G
LOCC
HOCC
VC-4 Switch
SC
System
Controller
VC-3/12
Switch
Ethernet
Card
SDH Card
...
Packet
Fabric
L2
Ethernet
Card
PDH
Card
...
...
Fig. 32 Block Diagram for hiT 7080
SURPASS hiT 7080 : System Core

PWR IO
I
O
1
I
O
2
I
O
3
I
O
4
S
I
H
S
/
E
1
H
S
/
E
1
H
S
/
E
1
H
S
/
E
1
H
I
S I
/ O O
E 5 6
1
19
20
21
22
23
24 25 26 27 28
29
30
I
O
7
I
I
O O
8 9
31
32
Equipment Core slots
33
Fiber Space
H
S H H H H H H H
O
C S S S S S S S
C
C
H
H H
H H
O
S S
S S
C
/ /
C
E E
10
H
S
/
E
H
S
/
E
H
S
S
C
/
E
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fiber Duct
Fan Tray
Fan Tray
Air Filter Tray
18
HS
HS/E
HS/E1
HOCC
SC
PWR IO
=High speed slot (20G)

=HS & also support DS3/STM-1E
=10G High Speed & E1/STM-1E
=High Order Cross-Connect slot
=System Controller slot
=Power Supply slot
Fig. 33 SURPASS hiT 7080 System Core
FT52423EN02GLA1
45
SC card
The SC card is the main control unit for SURPASS hiT 7080. It performs system
initialization, configuration, monitoring, and maintenance.
The SURPASS hiT 7080 can be equipped with redundant SC cards (1 + 1) to provide
customers with even higher reliability and stability. While the system is running,
configuration information, run time data, and other files are constantly synchronized
from the active to the standby card. In the event of a failure for the active card, the
standby card will become active and take over all SC functions the previously active
card allowing continuous control and full NE functionality. Switch from active to
standby cards can be triggered either manually by the operator or automatically in
case of failure.
The SC card is the main control unit for SURPASS hiT 7080. It performs system
initialization, configuration, monitoring and maintenance.
A Compact Flash (CF) memory card is equipped in the SC card. The NE database,
Management Information Base (MIB), system software and configurations are stored
in this nonvolatile memory card, which supports quick recovery in the event of power
failure, node failure or unit replacement.
On the card faceplate a DB9 (RS232) connector is provided. This interface is used to
connect a user terminal to carry out the initial IP address configuration of the network
element during the commissioning phase.
Four LEDs at the faceplate provide state information (see Fig. 35).
Via the Reset button a warm reboot of the SC card can be triggered.
46
FT52423EN02GLA1
System Controller SC
1 DB 9 (RS 232) Serial
Serial Line
Line interface
1 reset button
Warm reboot SC
LED
1 ACT (green)
1 PWR (green)
1 FAULT (red)
1 CF (green)
Pluggable CF card (512MB)
Store MIB and software load
Fig. 34 System Controller SC
SC Card: Faceplate LEDs

LED
Color
Status
CF
Green
On
Flashing
ACT
Green
FAULT
Green
Red
CF card is available
LED test
Off
CF card is not available
On
Working under EPG active state
Flashing
PWR
Description
LED test
Off
Working under standby state (not supported yet)
On
Indicate present internal power supply
Off
Power is not available
On
One or more alarms are present or the card is booting.
Flashing
Off
LED test
No alarms are present, and card is in service.
Fig. 35 Faceplate LED state meanings
FT52423EN02GLA1
47
SI and SI E cards (System Interface)

Both (SI and SI E) card provides the following main functions:
TNMS CT and TNMS Core access

Station clock synchronization access
MDI and MDO access
Alarm outputs
User Channel access
LED TEST, Alarm Cut Off (ACO) and Alarm Suppress (SUP) buttons
The difference between the SI and the SI-E card is the EOW function, where is
supported in the SI - E card.
Interface
T3 1, T3 2,
T4 1, T4 2
MDI 1 4,
MDI 5 8
MDO 1 4
MDO 5 8
ALM
HCOC 1,
HCOC 2
EOW
(Only on SI - E
card)
4 x RJ 45 connectors for four station clock interfaces, T3 stands

for clock in (2 Mbps or 2 MHz) and T4 stands for clock out (2
Mbps or 2 MHz).
2 x RJ 45 connectors to provide eight Miscellaneous Discrete
Input (MDI) ports. MDI's are used to read the status of external
alarm-points. Both the MDI description and severities are
configurable on the management system.
2 x RJ 45 connectors to provide eight Miscellaneous Discrete
Output (MDO) ports. MDO's are used to drive the external
devices. MDO can be activated or deactivated manually by the
management system.
RJ 45 alarm output interface, providing four alarm outputs,
including two audio and two visible alarm outputs.
2 x RJ 45 connectors for two extended user channels, two V.11
ports in total.
RJ 45 connector for E1 and E2. There are a maximum of 64
EOW channels (32 x E1 and 32 x E2). One to one or multiple
user calls can be performed through this interface.
MGT 1, MGT 2
2 x RJ 45 connectors for network management interfaces.
EXT 1, EXT 2,
EXT 3, EXT 4
4 x RJ 45 connectors for real extension shelf management.

(These ports are reserved for future use.)
F1 1, F1 2
DEBUG
48
Description
2 x RJ 45 connectors for two F1 user channels, two V.11 ports

in total.
Mini USB type port for module debugging.
FT52423EN02GLA1
SI (System Interface card) and
System
Interface
with
EOW:
SI E
SI-E (System
Interface
card
with EOW)
Buttons:
.- LED Test
.- ACO (Alarm Cutt off)
.- SUP (Alarm supression)
LEDs:
.- PWR (green color)
.- FAULT (red color)
.- CR Critical alarms (red color)
- on: one or more critical communication alarms are present
- flash: one or more critical non communications are present
- off: no critical alarms are present
.- MJ Major alarm (orange color)
.- MN Minor alarms (yellow color)
LED
Description
Buttons
PWR
LED TEST
CR
Interfaces:
.- Mini USB
.- Two MGM ports
For TNMS and LCT sumultaneos access
.- EOW access (Only available on SI E card)
.- Two ports T3 and two ports T4 for Station Clock
Synchronization
.- Eight MDIs access (two ports)
.- Eight MDOs access (two ports)
.- Alarm output
.- Two User Channels
.- Two HCOC interfaces
.- Four interfaces for extension Shelf
HCOC2
TEST
LED test button
T3-1 T3-2
T4-1
T4-2
ALM HCOC1
EOW
MDO1-4
MDI1-4
ACO
Alarm cut off button. The alarm outputs connected to the rack-top alarming module will be cut off by
pushing the button one time. System indicators (critical, major, and minor LEDs) on the NE will not be
suppressed.
SUP
Alarm suppress button.

When the
button isEXT-3
pushed, the
existing
(visible critical/major/minor
LED
MGT-1
EXT-1
F1-1
F1-2 alarmsMDO5-8
MDI5-8
indicators) on the SI card will
not be shown
system and the rack-top alarm module when the
MGT-2
EXT-2 on the
EXT-4
MJ
MN ACO SUP
button is pushed until the next alarm occurs.
DEBUG
FAULTY
Fig. 36 SI and SI E cards
BUTTONS
LEDs
SI and SI-E faceplate cards
INTERFACES
EOW
Fig. 37 SI and SI - E faceplate cards
FT52423EN02GLA1
49
HOCC card
SURPASS hiT 7080 supports 340 Gbps (2176 x 2176 VC-4s) high order fabric
capacity that can interconnect AU4's between any SDH and Ethernet port accessing
the system. The switch fabric provides non blocking switching of traffic at VC-4,
VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c and VC-4-64c levels.
Two HOCC slots are available which support HOCC card 1 + 1 protection.
LOCC
SURPASS hiT 7080 supports a 20 Gbps low order switching capacity on one card
that can interconnect TU-12s and TU-3s between any SDH and Ethernet port
accessing the system. The switch fabric provides non-blocking switching of traffic at
VC-12 and VC-3 levels.
For added LOCC capacity the SURPASS hiT 7080 can use two LOCC working cards
together to support a 40 Gbps capacity. Upgrade from 20 Gbps to 40 Gbps LOCC
capacity can be done without traffic interruption.
SURPASS hiT 7080 provides up to four HS slots which support LOCC card 1 + 1
protection for both 20 Gbps and 40 Gbps applications.
The LOCC card can be equipped in the following manner:
Protected:
20 G LOCC: slot 6 working and slot 7 protection
40 G LOCC: slot 5 and 6 working and slot 7 and 8 protection
TIP
The LOCC can be upgraded from 20 G to 40 G without any traffic interruption by
adding new LOCC cards to slot 5 and 8.
Unprotected:
20 G LOCC: slot 6
40 G LOCC: slot 5 and 6
50
FT52423EN02GLA1
Cross connection arquitecture
Fig. 38 Cross-connection architecture
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51
Power Distribution
The Breaker Panel is mounted on top of the rack. Four circuit breakers (20 A) are
used for the hiT 7080 shelf in the rack (two for working power supply and two for
protection power supply). Two pre-manufactured cables with fast-on terminals are
used to interconnect to the Power Input connectors at the top of the subracks.
Overvoltage protection and EMI filtering is provided by the Power I/O section. Input
Power monitoring is performed by the SC card. Status LEDs at the power I/O section
indicate that the corresponding power supply is on.
Equipment plug-in-units are equipped with a power converter (decentralized power
supply) that provides all necessary supply voltages to the specific card. The power
converter is operated from two independent battery feeds.
FAN
Two fan units are used to cool the system. Each fan unit is equipped with three fans.
The state of fans is monitored by the system.
The FAULT LED on the front panel indicates the fault state of any fan in the fan unit.
WARNING
The system can not work without any fan unit.
TIP
The system can still work normally within 16 hours if only one fan unit has failed. The
action of the fan unit replacement must be finished within 2 minutes.
Filter unit
One filter unit is used to protect the main shelf from environmental dust. A state
supervision of the filter unit is not provided by the system.
WARNING
An excessively dirty filter unit will reduce cooling airflow.
TIP
The filter unit replacement must be treated as a periodic maintenance procedure to
ensure that the fans are able to sustain optimum shelf operating temperature.
52
FT52423EN02GLA1
Power Distribution
RET/RED
-48V/BLUE
RET/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK
RET/RED
-48V/BLUE
RET/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK
WORKING
PROTECTING
RETURN/RED
-48V/BLUE
RETURN/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK
RETURN/RED
-48V/BLUE
Power(A)
RETURN/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK
Power(B)
Fig. 39 Power Distribution
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
53
3.2.4
PDH Interface Cards
12 x E3/DS3 (W/P) Interface Card

The 12 x E3/DS3 interface card can be divided into two modules:
12 x E3/DS3 Function Card (processing card)

12 x E3/DS3 I/O Card with 75 Ohms impedance CC4 connectors
Each E3/DS3 port can be configured as E3 or DS3 transmission mode. The E3/DS3
(W/P) card must be installed accompanied by its I/O card. Each E3/DS3 signal is
mapped into a Low Order VC-3 and forwarded to line interface for transmission.
There are 24 CC4 connectors and every E3/DS3 interface uses two CC4 connectors.
For I/O cards, there is only one LED PWR, which indicates the status of the cards
power.
126 x E1/R (W/P) Interface Card
This card can be divided into two modules as following:
126 E1/R (W/P) Function Card

63 E1/R I/O (75 or 120 Ohms) Interface Card
The 126 x E1/R (W/P) card is used in combination with two 63 x E1 I/O boards. The
connector is based 2 mm connector.
The board on the left side handles the first 63 ports and the board on the right
side handles ports 64 until 126.
In 126 x E1/R cards, any one of the E1 ports could be used as the timing source, but
the maximum four ports can be selected as the same time.
The retiming function can be enabled or disabled for any of the 126 E1 ports on the
LCT or the TNMS. With retiming function enable, the transmitter eliminates wander
and jitter in the incoming clock. While the rate of the outgoing 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz
signal is normally equal to the rate of the 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal going into the SDH
network, occasionally this relationship disappears. A retiming function is necessary
for suppression of jitter and wander that the 2 Mbit/s signal suffers during
transmission in SDH and which makes the signal useless for carrying the
synchronous frequency to the PDH domain.
To retime an outgoing 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal, means simply to retime this signal
with the internal clock of the multiplexer equipment in which the desynchronization
takes place. This can be done by reading the recovered 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal into
an elastic store and timing the output of the elastic store with the system clock.
When the device is set in the retiming mode all jitter and wander due to the
multiplexing or demultiplexing process in the transmission is eliminated.
The SURPASS hiT 7080 chassis supports 1:4 protection for the E1 card against the
equipment failure and carrier class Equipment protection switching.
54
FT52423EN02GLA1
SURPASS hiT
hiT 7080 PDH Cards
Cards
SURPASS
PDH Cards
Core Cards
CTRL &
OH Access
SCOH
W
12 x E3/DS3 I/O
12 x 34/45 M electrical ports
12 x E3/DS3
1:N Card Portection
63 x E1 I/O
System
SI
Interface
63 x E1 I/O
126 x E1
126 x 2M electrical ports

1:N Card Protection
High Order
Switch Frabric
340 G @ VC-4
HOCC
W
and SETS
SDH Cards
(Card Protection)
Low Order
Switch Frabric
Ethernet Cards
LOCC
W
20 G @ VC-3/-12
(Card Protection)
Amplifier Cards
Fig. 40 Surpass hiT 7080: PDH Cards
PDH Cards Faceplates

12 x E3/DS3
12 x E3/DS3 I/O
CC4 connector
126 x E1
63 x E1 I/O
2 mm connector
Fig. 41 PDH Cards Faceplates
FT52423EN02GLA1
55
3.2.5
SDH Interface Cards
SURPASS hiT 7080 provides the following SDH interfaces:

8 STM-1 E interface Card
This card can be divided in two parts:
8 x STM-1E Function Card.

8 x STM-1E IO Card with Ohm impedance CC4 connector.
The 8 x STM-1E (W/P) card is used in combination with 8 x STM-1E IO cards.
The SURPASS hiT 7080 chassis supports two groups of 1: 4 protection for the STM1E card against the equipment failure and carrier class equipment protection
switching.
Any pair of STM-1 electrical ports in same or different 8 x STM-1E (W/P) cards can
be set to support SNCP/I, SNCP/N, MSP, EOW and DCC (including OSI-light, GRE
tunnel, third-party DCC transparency, etc.).
8 STM-4/-1
The 8 x STM-4/-1 card provides eight STM-4/1 ports compliant with ITU-T G.957, or
eight electrical STM-1 ports compliant with ITU-T G.703.
The card can be equipped with up to eight STM-4 or STM-1 optical SFP modules or
STM-1 electrical SFP modules. Each port on this card can be configured to STM-4 or
STM-1 (default) mode through TNMS CT or TNMS Core.
It is possible to mix freely the different SFP modules within one traffic card.
The card supports 1+1 and 1: N MSP protection, SNCP protection and 2F MSSPRing protection.
8 STM-16
This card provides eight STM-16 ports compliant with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.695.
The card can be equipped with up to eight STM-16 optical SFP modules.
It is possible to mix the different SFP modules within one traffic card.
2 STM-64
This card provides two STM-64 ports compliant with ITU-T G.691 and Transport
System Generic Requirements (TSGR) GR-1377-Core.
The card can be equipped with a maximum of two STM-64 optical XFP modules.
It is possible to mix the different XFP modules within one traffic card.
56
FT52423EN02GLA1
SURPASS hiT 7080 SDH Cards

PDH Cards
Core Cards
SDH Cards
CTRL &
OH Access
SCOH
P
8 x STM-1 E
SI
System Interface
8 x STM-1 electrical ports
8 x STM-1 I/O
8 x STM-4/1
1+1, 1:N MSP and SNCP
S
F
P
340 G @ VC-4
8 x STM-1 electrical
1+1, 1:N MSP or 2F-MS-SPRing for STM-4
High Order
Switch Frabric
8 x STM-1 optical or
HOCC
8 x STM-16
and SETS
S
F
P
8 x STM-16 optical
(Card Protection)
2 x STM-64
Low Order
Switch Frabric
LOCC
20 G @ VC-3/-12
S
F
P
2 x STM-64 optical
Ethernet Cards
W
P
(Card Protection)
Amplifier Cards
Fig. 42 SURPASS hiT 7080: SDH Cards
SDH Cards Faceplates

8 x STM-1 E Card
8 x STM-1 I/O Card
CC4 connector
8 x STM-4/1 Card
8 x STM-16 Card
SFP
LINK
2 x STM-64 Card
XFP
LINK
Fig. 43 SDH Cards Faceplates
FT52423EN02GLA1
57
3.2.6
Data Interface Cards
SURPASS hiT 7080 supports the following data service cards:

8 GE/T
The card provides eight Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces (SFP) on the client side
which only supports transparent transmission function. GE signal is encapsulated into
GFP packets and then mapped into mixed VC-4-Xv and VC-3-Xv payload for
transmission. The total bandwidth is up 10 G. All ports can work at a wire speed
simultaneously.
Additionally, the first two ports can be configured working as standard 1 Gbit/s
Ethernet or 1.0625 Gbps Fiber Channel working mode. When these ports are
working as 1Gbit/s FC, GFP-T will be used.
It is possible to mix the different SFP modules within one traffic card.
Other detail features are listed below:
VCAT supported
LCAS supported, according to ITU-T G.7042
Differential delay per VCG group tolerance up to 128 ms
6 x GE + 4 x FEGE/A
The card provides 6 x GE optical SFP interfaces (or electrical SFP interfaces) and 4
electrical 10/100/1000 M auto negotiation interfaces (RJ-45 interface).
The Layer main functions supported by this card are as follows:
LAN / WAN ports aggregation.

Auto negotiation, flow control, IEEE 802.3, and Ethernet II frames structure
supported by the FE/GE ports.
Access Control List (ACL) based on MAC addresses.

VLAN and double VLAN tagging, providing increased number of VLANs.
Rapid Spanning Tree (802.1 w) and Multiple Spanning Tree (802.1s), dramatically
reducing restoration time.
Providing per port rate limiting function: The rate range of each port is from 128
Kbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Kbps to 1 Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning
granularity is 128 Kbps.
Providing per VLAN rate limiting function. The rate range of each VLAN is from
128 Kbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Kbps to 1Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning
Providing 802.1p QoS/CoS based on Ethernet port and/or VLAN.
58
FT52423EN02GLA1
SURPASS hiT 7080 Ethernet Cards

PDH Cards
Core Cards
SDH Cards
CTRL &
SCOH
OH Access
Ethernet Cards
W
P
SI
System Interface
High Order
Switch Frabric
HOCC
340 G @ VC-4
8 x GE / T
S
F
P
6 x GE +
4 x FEGE / A
S
F
P
2 x GE +
12 x FE / RPR
S
F
P
1 x 10 GE / T
X
F
P
8 x GE electrical or optical ports

(2 x FC) optical
6 x GE optical / electrical and
4 x FE/GE electrical
2 x GE electrical or optical
6 x FE electrical interfaces
and SETS
(Card Protection)
1 x 10 GE +
10 x GE / L2
Low Order
LOCC
Switch Frabric
1 x 10 GE optical
1 x 10 GE optical
XFP
S
F
P
10 x GE optical or electrical
20 G @ VC-3/-12
(Card Protection)
Amplifier Cards
Fig. 44 SURPASS hiT 7080: Ethernet cards
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
59
Layer 2 multicast functions, including static provisioned multicast and IGMP

Snooping multicast functions.
LCAS supported
GFP encapsulation (ITU - T G.7041/Y.1303)
The card support 10 GE LAN ports and 12 GE + 24 FE WAN ports.
Each 100M WAN port can be mapped to VC-12-Xv (X = 1...46) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1...3)
via GFP, mixed VC-12-Xv and VC-3-Xv is supported and also LCAS.
Each 1000M WAN port can be mapped to VC-3-Xv (X = 1...21) or VC-4-Xv (X = 1...7)
via GFP, mixed VC-3-Xv and VC-4-Xv is supported and also LCAS.
The total bandwidth is up 64 x VC-4 (10 G).
2 GE + 12 FE RPR
The card provides RPR function on SDH. There are 12 x 10/100 M Base T
interfaces (RJ-45) and 2 x GE optical / electrical SFP interfaces on the client side.
This module supports L2 switching, RPR MAC, GFP, virtual concatenation and
LCAS. There are two WAN ports on the network side. The bandwidth of each port is
8 x VC-4. The total bandwidth is up to 2.5 G
The Layer 2 functions supported by this module are:
VLAN and double tagging, providing increased member of VLANs

A shareable memory space for both FE and GE interfaces on each card
Access Control List (ACL) based on MAC address
Rate limiting per port / VLAN: the rate range of each port is from 64 Kbps to 100
Mbps (FE) or 64 Kbps to 1 Gbps (GE) and the rate provisioning granularity is 64
Kbps. Each FE and GE interfaces provides enough buffers to support burst data
traffic transmission and consequently make traffic congestion under control.
RPR function:
SDH especial reuse.

Source weighted fairness (Class B and C traffic only)
Handle three classes of Services (Class A, B and C). Class A traffic can occupy up
to 50 % of total RPR bandwidth and only the class A traffic supports strict order
transmission.
Per port based service rate limiting function: The rate of each port is from 128
Kbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Kbps to 1 Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning
Per VLAN based service rate limiting function: The rate range of each VLAN is
from 128 Mbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Mbps to 1 Gbps (GE), and the rate
provisioning granularity is 128 Kbps.
RPR layer protection: steering or wrapping protection (user provisional).

60
FT52423EN02GLA1
Ethernet Faceplate Cards

8 x GE / T
SFP
LINK
6 x GE + 4 FEGE / A
RJ 45 connector
2 x GE + 12 x FE / RPR
Fig. 45 Ethernet Faceplate Cards I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
61
Topology discovery
FE ports support auto negotiation, flow control, IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet II frame
structure
GFP encapsulation according with ITU-T G.7041 / Y.1303

Virtual concatenation (VC-4-Xv; VC-3-Xv and VC-12-Xv) and LCAS functionality
SDH and Ethernet performance monitoring and alarms.
1 10GE/T
This card provides one 10 Gigabit Ethernet optical interface with the transparent
transmission function (P2P). The total bandwidth is up to 64 x VC-4 (10G). One VCG
groups will be supported and it can be mapped into VC-4-Xv (X = 1...64). GFP-F
encapsulation is used for Ethernet frame.
Summary of key functions:
The 10 GE ports support flow control and it can be configurable (enable/ disable).
Support LCAS.
Performance monitoring function.
The 10 GE port can be transmitted full speed and full duplex mode.
Admin Shutdown / ALS / Port Monitoring functions supported. Admin Shutdown
will turn off the port. All traffic on this port will be blocked. All received traffic will be
dropped and no signal will be sent out when it is shutdown.
1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE / L2
The 1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE/L2 is a 20 G layer 2 Ethernet card with a 40 G switch
capacity which is composed of a mother and daughter card together (occupying 2
physical slots in the NE) providing 11 LAN ports and 80 WAN ports.
Front panel interfaces:

One 10 GE optical XFP interface (mother card).
Ten GE optical or electrical SFP interfaces (daughter card).
Backplane side:
40 x WAN ports sharing up to 10 G (64 x VC-4) for the 10 GE mother card.
40 x WAN ports sharing up to 10 G (64 x VC-4) for the 10 x GE daughter card.
The 1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE/L2 card supports L2 switching, GFP, high/low order virtual
concatenation, LCAS, and LAN / WAN port aggregation. Two WAN ports (VCG 1 and
VCG 41) can be configured with up to 10 Gbps of bandwidth using VC-4-Xv (X = 1 to
64) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1 to 192). The other 78 WAN ports (VCG 2 - 40 and VCG 42 -
62
FT52423EN02GLA1
Ethernet Faceplate cards

1 x 10 GE / T
XFP
1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE / L2
SFP
Fig. 46 Ethernet Faceplate Cards
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
63
80) can be configured with up to 2 Gbps using VC-4-Xv (X = 1 to 14) or VC-3-Xv (X =

1 to 42).
The main functions supported by this card are as follows:
LAN / WAN port aggregation

Multicast IGMP snooping
VLAN and double VLAN tagging
VLAN translation
Link Aggregation
128k MAC addresses (shared among dynamic, static, and multicast addresses)
ACL based on MAC addresses
Multiple policing options including: CIR; EIR; PIR; CBS; EBS.
Priority settings according to:
DiffServ value in incoming frame
Transparent transport of MPLS frames
Per port rate limiting function: The rate range of each port is as follows:
128 Kbps to 100 Mbps for FE
128 Kbps to 1 Gbps for GE
2.3 Mbps to 10 Gbps for 10 GE
The rate provisioning granularity is 128 Kbps for FE and GE; 1 Mbps for 10 GE
Per VLAN rate limiting function.
Auto negotiation, flow control, IEEE 802.3, and Ethernet II frame structure
supported by the FE/GE/10 GE ports
GFP encapsulation (ITU-T G.7041/Y.1303)

VC-4-Xv (X = 1 to 7), VC-3-Xv (X = 1 to 21), and LCAS function supported by the
GE WAN port
SDH and Ethernet performance monitoring and alarms

GMRP function
GVRP function
MSTP function
64
FT52423EN02GLA1
SURPASS hiT 7080 Amplifier Cards

PDH Cards
SDH Cards
Core Cards
Ethernet Cards
CTRL &
Amplifier Cards
SCOH
OH Access
RX
POA 20 dB
System Interface
SI
STM-16
TX
BOA 13 dBm
STM-1/4/16/64
Switch Frabric
340 G @ VC-4
HCOCC
and SETS
TX
BOA 15 dBm
STM-1/4/16
(Card Protection)
TX
BOA 18 dBm
STM-1/4/16
Fig. 47 SURPASS hiT 7080: Amplifier cards
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
65
3.2.7
Optical Amplifier Cards
This OA (Optical Amplifier) module provides uni-directional single optical amplifier

function with optical performance monitoring capabilities. This module is designed to
compensate losses in the entire C band as Booster or Pre-amplifier in the Metro
networks.
The following variants are available:
Optical Booster Amplifier 18 dBm

Optical Pre-Amplifier 20 dB
The EDFA (Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier) sub-module is the core building block for
the Optical Amplifier cards. It provides optical signal amplification function. With
integrated fast digital circuit and advanced software, the EDFAs can be configured to
operate at APC, ACC or AGC mode.
APC (automatic power control) mode: In this mode, the optical output power is
maintained constant by adjusting the laser pump current to compensate minor
changes in OA input power, component aging, and temperature variation. This
mode is mainly used in Booster application.
AGC (automatic gain control) mode: In this mode, the OA provides constant
power gain by adjusting the pump laser current in order to compensate minor
changes in component aging and temperature. This mode is mainly used in preamplifier application.
ACC (automatic current control) mode: In this mode, the pump laser current is
maintained constant.
These modes can be set through software according to customers requirements. In

addition, other significant parameters that need to be pre-set are the Input optical
power low threshold, the Output optical power low threshold and the Low and High
temperature threshold for output power shutdown.
3.2.8
Dispersion Compensation Module
The dispersion compensation module can be used in conjunction with the STM-16
interfaces in order to achieve large distances.
The DCM is a 1U high external module that can be installed in the same rack as the
hiT7080.
The module name is:
Disp. Comp. Module G.652, 40km, 6dB
66
FT52423EN02GLA1
Application Example for BOA, POA and DCM
180km
18dBm
18dBm
BOA
BOA
Tx
Tx
20dBm
20dBm
POA
POA
DCM
DCM
40km
40km
Rx
Rx
STM-16
DCM
DCM
40km
40km
Rx
Rx
20dBm
20dBm
POA
POA
18dBm
18dBm
BOA
BOA
Tx
Tx
Fig. 48 SURPASS hiT 7080: Example for BOA, POA and DCM
hiT 7080: Amplifier Card Faceplates

PWR
POA 20dB
LINK
FAULT
PWR
BOA 13 dBm
LINK
FAULT
PWR
BOA 15 dBm
LINK
FAULT
PWR
BOA 18 dBm
LINK
FAULT
Fig. 49 hiT 7080: Amplifier Card Faceplates
FT52423EN02GLA1
67
3.2.9
SFP/XFP Modules
In hiT 7080 for the optical interface units (i.e. STM-1/-4/-16/-64 Interfaces and Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces) pluggable optical modules are used.
SFP modules are used for STM-1/-4/-16 as well as for GbE interfaces.
XFP modules are used for STM-64 interfaces.
There are no restrictions for equipping the boards with the SFP/XFP Modules, any
combinations of unequipped and all available modules are possible.
There is also the possibility to use STM-1el SFP Modules and electrical Gigabit
Ethernet SFP Modules in respective optical interface units.
68
FT52423EN02GLA1
GBIC, XFP and SFP modules
Fig. 50 GBIC, XFP and SFP modules
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52423EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
69
70
FT52423EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Operating terminal
Contents
1
1.1
1.2
2
2.1
2.2
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
4
System manuals
1.2 Online help system
General features
Introduction
Functional overview
Getting started
What you need to navigate
Basic operations
Connecting to the Network Element
Exercises
FT52424EN02GLA1
3
4
6
9
10
12
19
20
28
42
53
Operating terminal
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
System manuals
Fig. 1
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
1.1
The documentation of the TNMS CT (Telecommunication Network Management

System Craft Terminal) comprises the following descriptions and manuals:
The User Manual (UMN)

The User Manual (UMN) consists of the following main chapters:
Information
This chapter provides an overview of the applications, system architecture,
features and functions of TNMS CT.
Installation
This chapter contains instructions on installing the TNMS CT software.
Operation
This chapter contains a general description of the TNMS CT user interfaces as
well as the necessary background information.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
The content of the Graphical User Interface Manual is identical to the complete
Online Help, but converted to a printable PDF file. In addition, every GUI-related help
window is supplemented by a sample screenshot.
All TNMS CT manuals are available on CD-ROM, and can be ordered in English from
SIEMENS Technical Sales.
In order to be able to read the PDF files properly, you need
Windows
UNIX
Windows 95/98
SUN Solaris 2.5 or higher
Windows NT/2000/XP
and Acrobat Reader (Version 8 is part of installation package) with search function.
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Official documentation
U
M
N
G
U
I
M
N
Fig. 2 Official documentation
Documentation on CD-ROM
UMN
(pdf)
GUIMN
(pdf)
Acrobat
Reader
Fig. 3 Documentation on CD-ROM
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
1.2
1.2
Online help system
You can use the online help system that is provided with the TNMS CT software to
receive information about all the window contents and menus. The Contents, Index
and Find tabs enable the online help to be searched quickly and conveniently. You
may also display essential steps of important operating sequences via the help table
of contents. Individual help topics can be printed, and context-sensitive help texts
called up directly from the user interface.
Internet explorer setting
To view the help pages normally, set the internet explorer as follows:
Tools tab Internet Options window Advanced tab Security setting
select Allow active content to run in files on My Computer
Help can be requested in any of the following ways:
1. After calling up Help from the menu bar, you can search for topics via the table of
contents, via the index or via a full-text search.
2. Clicking the Help button in the current window, displays information about the
window contents.
3. Pressing <F1> displays information about the contents of the window that is
active at the moment.
TIP
The Online Help gives detailed information on the tasks that are to be performed with
TNMS CT. It also provides detailed description about the individual windows, fields,
and icons used in TNMS CT.
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
2
1
Fig. 4 TNMS CT: Online Help
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52424EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Operating terminal
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
General features
Fig. 5
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
2.1
Introduction
TNMS CT is a common platform solution for different Network Element (NE) types.
This management system basically consists of PC hardware (standard PC) and an
Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OAM) PC software, which provides a
high performance supervision and control tool using the internal supervision and
control software implemented in the Network Elements. TNMS CT is a transparent
software platform for SDH and WDM network elements using:
QD2
QST
Q3
SNMP
telegram protocols.
TNMS CT provides access to network elements via:
Network interface (Ethernet) or

Serial line interface (RS232) (not supported by hiT 7080).
TNMS CT allows local as well as remote operation and control. It is possible to
open more than one NE application at the same time. This way there is the additional
possibility to have a graphical network view, concerning fault detection and network
management.
The TNMS CT menu items and dialogues allow the supported communication
channels to be set up. The network element to be operated is selected by a simple
procedure, adapted to the requirements of the connected communication channel.
TNMS CT enables addresses to be assigned to the network elements. The
program icons for these applications are used to present the assigned network
elements in the network view.
10
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
TNMS CT (Craft Terminal)

TNMS CT
Server
Remote
client
WAN / Internet
WAN
/ Internet
TNMS CT
Server
Remote
client
LAN
LCT
hiT 7500
hiT 7300
LCT
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
STM-16
BSHR/4
STM-16
BSHR/4
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
MSP 1+1
hiT 7070
MSP 1+1
Fig. 6 TNMS CT (Craft Terminal)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52424EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
Operating terminal
2.2
2.2.1
Functional overview
Client/server Architecture
TNMS CT is a scalable single user system with a client / server architecture

comprising several industry standard PCs with the MS Windows 2000 or XP
operating system and various software applications.
The TNMS CT software comprises of a Client and a Server component.
Client component: It provides a network management user interface. Via this GUI
all TNMS CT management functions, e.g. invoking of element managers, are
available.
Server component: It holds the EML packages and the Net Server frame, which
provides the environment for running EML servers, DCN connectors and NE
controllers.
Client and Server software components can be installed on one PC as well as on

separate PC's.
12
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
TNMS CT: Client/server architecture

Remote
client
TNMS CT
Server
TNMS CT Client & Server

components
TNMS CT Client
component
WAN / Internet
WAN
/ Internet
TNMS CT
Server
Local
client
TNMS CT Server
component
LAN
hiT 7500
hiT 7300
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
STM-16
BSHR/4
STM-16
BSHR/4
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
MSP 1+1
hiT 70xx
MSP 1+1
Fig. 7 TNMS CT: Client/Server architecture
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52424EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
Operating terminal
2.2.2
LCT and NCT modes
Depending on the needs, two different modes are available for TNMS CT.
LCT Mode:
The Local Craft Terminal (LCT) is used for local management and commissioning of
network elements. The LCT can communicate with a maximum of 50 network
elements. Up to three element managers may be open at the same time only.
NCT Mode:
The Network Craft Terminal (NCT) is used for local or remote management of
network elements. In addition to the LCT functions, the monitoring of all the alarms
reported from each accessible network element is allowed. The NCT can
communicate with a maximum of 150 network elements (including alarm monitoring).
Up to 50 element managers may be open at the same time only.
TIP
Each mode requires its own license key. Furthermore, the installation routines are
slightly different from each other.
WARNING
Some NEs, such as QST and QD2 NEs, allow the connection to several
management system levels. If a management system like TNMS Core enforces write
access on a network element, it will override the TNMS CT write access.
14
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
TNMS CT: LCT and NCT modes

The NCT mode supports the daily work of a service
technician in a software tool optimized way
Supports of up to 150 NEs at the same time
without restriction of the Network topology complexity
Max. 50 open element managers at the same time
Local or remote Client login capability is supported
Network Alarm list or Network Alarm logs are supported
The LCT mode provides the service

technician with a basic function access
to the network element (NOT SUPPORTED
BY hiT 7080 !)
NCT
Network interface
(Ethernet)
Supports of up to 50 NEs at the same time

without restriction of the Network
topology complexity
Max. 3 open element managers at the same time
Elementary requirements for NE commissioning
One Client and one Server on the same PC
Metro-Access
STM-1/4/16
LCT
Serial line interface
(RS232) or Ethernet
Fig. 8 LCT and NCT modes
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52424EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
Operating terminal
2.2.3
Graphical user interface
The TNMS CT specific software package allows the creation of a graphical
representation of the network such as a geographical arrangement of the NE

symbols as an example.
Each NE is represented on the GUI by an individual icon.

The NE specific Element Manager can be activated via mouse click on the NE
symbol.
It is possible to open more than one Element Manager Application at the same
time.
Program control and command entry can be performed by means of the mouse
and / or keyboard using pull down menus and the deposition of popup menus,
activated via right mouse button click.
All menus and actions, which can be activated via popup menu, are also
selectable via pull down menu titles.
Menu titles and menu options, which are frequently used, can also be selected via
function keys.
The operator is guided through the program by menus. One has no need to learn
complex command syntax. Furthermore the program offers mechanisms as filtering
or sorting of information and offers support through help functions.
16
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Graphical User Interface (GUI)
Fig. 9 TNMS CT GUI
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52424EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
Operating terminal
18
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Getting started
LCT
LCT
NCT
T
SC
TNM
Fig. 10
FT52424EN02GLA1
19
Operating terminal
3.1
3.1.1
What you need to navigate

Starting TNMS CT server
TNMS CT Server is started automatically on system startup, before any user is

logged on. Once it has been started, a connection to all configured and activated
network elements is established and their data is uploaded. An icon is displayed in
the Windows 2000/XP taskbar. Once the Server has started, it is always active.
Moreover, terminating the Client does not result in stopping the Server and
disconnecting from the NEs.
3.1.2
Starting a TNMS CT client session
Once the TNMS CT Server has been started, TNMS CT Client can be started from
the Computers Desktop:
1.
From "Start" menu
or
2.
using the "CT Client" icon.
3.1.3
Working with the mouse
Both the left and the right mouse button are used when working with the GUI. The left
mouse button (LMB) may be used for the following actions:
Select a context menu from the top bar of a window.

Select a menu item.
Select a function using the features available in a window (buttons, selection
menus etc.).
Confirm an action (e.g. Apply).

A great number of operations within both interfaces can only be invoked via context
menus. A context menu is called by clicking an object of the graphical user interface
with the right mouse button (RMB). This displays a selection of menu items which are
relevant for the selected object in the given situation.
20
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Starting a TNMS CT client session
TNMS CT Server
Is running
Fig. 11 Starting a TNMS CT client session
3.1.4
Working with the keyboard
The TNMS CT user interface is driven by context menus (click on objects in the
user interface with the right mouse button) and therefore cannot be operated without
a mouse. Therefore this manual refers throughout to mouse control. However, it is
possible to use the keyboard to perform the actions listed in the main menus. Hold
down the <Alt> key and press the underlined letters for the menu items you want to
use. For example:
Main window Fault menu Alarm List... entry = <Alt>+<A>, <L>.
If there are no underlined letters visible, please press <Alt>. To open a context menu
you can also use <Shift>+<F10>.
By using the <TAB> key it is possible to jump between the different window panels.
In the remaining chapters of this manual it is presumed that the operator works with a
mouse.
FT52424EN02GLA1
21
Operating terminal
3.1.5
Login procedure of TNMS CT client
TIP
Before you can obtain the user access to the TNMS CT Client the related TNMS
CT server has to be started.
Login as follows:
(Use the tabulator key to toggle between the fields in the Login dialog field.)
Enter the name or the IP address of the TNMS CT server.

By default the name of the TNMS CT server, at which the last login took place,
will be displayed.
TIP
When the TNMS CT server, at which you want to log on, is on the local system, the
server-name is 'localhost'.
Enter a valid user name and password. By default the name of the last logged on
user is displayed. Your TNMS administrator gives you your user name and
password.
TIP
When entering the user name details please distinguish between the upper and lower
case letters! To protect your password, it is displayed asterisks (*) while you are
entering it.
Click on 'Login' button or press the enter key.

In case the Advisory window is displayed, please confirm the advisory message
with "OK".
You will be logged on.

Advisory window
The Advisory window consists of company specific message for the employed
operators displayed at login.
The window has its own toolbar:
Click "OK" to confirm the message.

Click "Cancel" to exit the Advisory window and abort the login.
The following information is provided in this window:
"Last Login" Displays the date and time of the operator's last login.
"Advisory Message" Displays a message to be configured under Security
Settings window.
22
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Login procedure
Fig. 12 Login procedure
Advisory Window
Fig. 13 Advisory Window
FT52424EN02GLA1
23
Operating terminal
3.1.6
TNMS CT client: main window
The TNMS CT GUI gives access to all functions for supervision, operation,
configuration and maintenance of the network. The set of functions available to each
individual operator depends on the operators user class that is defined by the
administrator.
Via the TNMS CT GUI you can also start the element manager applications (e.g.
the EM of an SMA16/4 or the MSN Manager) to control and configure individual
network elements.
The TNMS Client user interface consists of the following parts:
1. Menu bar:
Menu bar of the TNMS CT main window contains the number of the menu items.
When you click on one of these menu items, the pull down menu specific to the
menu item opens.
2. Toolbar:
The toolbar runs along the top edge of the main window above the working area.
Clicking on one of these buttons with the left mouse button provides quick and
particularly easy access to certain frequently used functions.
3. Status bar:
The status bar runs along the bottom of the main window. It gives information on
the operating states and displays important messages, such as alarms, in short
form.
24
Notification Area
A short help text for the currently selected window, menu entry
or toolbar button.
Operator
User ID of the currently logged in operator.
Server Name
Name of the connected Server.
Server State
State of the TNMS CT Server, i.e. idle, starting up, shutting

down or running.
Time
Time display, i.e. local, GMT or CST.
Alarms
Alarm severities and counters for each severity, i.e.

indeterminate, critical, major, minor, warning (from left to right)
SSL
Secure connection to the server is established.
Data Semaphore
Open transactions, i.e. no open transactions (green), open

transactions (red).
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
TNMS CT Client: Main Window

1
2
4
Server Name
Notification
area
Operator
SSL
Server State
Time
Alarms
Data
Semaphore
Fig. 14 TNMS CT client: main window
4. Network View:
The Network View provides graphical representation of your network. Orientation
within the Network View can be improved by using a background bitmap. For
example, you can attach the picture of a city map to be displayed in the
background of the network plan and position your network elements in this map
according to their real location. Moreover, the Network View offers quick access to
information concerning single NEs (e.g. current access state, alarm state). Each
item of the Network View offers an individual context menu.
5. Working Area:
This is the main area where the operator can arrange the individual work place.
FT52424EN02GLA1
25
Operating terminal
3.1.7
Representation of the network
The "Network View" contains the TNMS CT network map. On the network map the
network elements can be placed according to the network topology with the help of a
background bitmap. Additionally, links can be drawn between the NEs and port
connections can be set up.
The network element icon is used to indicate the type of the network element.
Different states of the network element are shown by the extra symbols of the
network element icon.
A network element in the maintenance mode does not send notifications. This state
will be indicated with a wrench symbol on the network element icon.
In addition to the display of the network element states the NE icon is also used to
show the alarm status and alarm severity of the received alarms.
26
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Network Element states

Icon
Write Access
NE in the
maintenance
mode.
Graphical
presentation
of the active
alarm(s).
unknown
no write access
external management system/LCT
NEC
EM of this TNMS CT
Port
connection.
EM of this TNMS CT and NEC

Icon
Operational
State
Access State
enabled
ready
disabled
ready
unknown
disconnected
unknown
failure
unknown
starting up
unknown
shutting down
unknown
The NE is deactivated in the DCN Management.
init failed
The NE has not finished its initialisation successfully and is

inoperable. It is only possible to reinitialize the data via TNMS CT.
Operational
status is
disabled.
Fig. 15 Representation of the network and network element states
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52424EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27
Operating terminal
3.2
3.2.1
Basic operations
Starting Element Manager Applications
The element manager applications are started via the TNMS CT "Network View"
window. A data connection is established to the relevant NE which allows the user to
execute required functions directly at the NE. Element Manager Applications provide
a set of functions for provisioning and reconfiguring a network element (NE). The
different configuration data, such as cross connections, alarm filters (e.g. suppression
of Alarms), performance thresholds and synchronization features will be inserted in
tables or graphical views, depending from the NE, that shall be configured.
To start Element Manager Application:
1. Right mouse click on the NE symbol.
2. From the opened context menu "Start Element Manager" menu (LMB) has to be
selected.
3. Element Manager Application is started and NE "Chassis View" window is
opened.
The other way to start the Element Manager application, is just clicking twice over the
NE symbol and wait until the "Chassis View" of the NE open.
28
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Fig. 16 Starting the element manager
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52424EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Operating terminal
3.2.2
Background bitmap
Orientation within the Network View can be improved by using a background bitmap.
For example, there is possible to attach a picture of a city map to be displayed in the
background of the network plan and position your network elements in this map
according to their real location.
To add a new background bitmap for the Network View:
1. Right mouse click on the "Network View" window and from the opened context
menu select "Background"
2. In the "Background" window tick on the check box "None" and than press
"Brows" button.
3. In the "Browse for Background Map" window select the background bitmap to
be used and than press "Open" button.
4. To apply modifications press (LMB) "OK" button.
3.2.3
Network element properties
To display properties of the Network Element:

1. Select (RMB) network element icon, properties to be displayed
2. From opened Pull Down menu select "Properties".
3. "Properties" window is displayed.
30
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
3
2
Fig. 17 Adding a background bitmap
1
3
2
Fig. 18 Network element properties
FT52424EN02GLA1
31
Operating terminal
3.2.4
3.2.4.1
Network topology management

Links
To show connections between network elements the graphical links can be drawn.
You can configure up to four lines for each link. To configure a line, complete the
following steps:
4. Right mouse click on the symbol of the first NE, and from opened context menu
select "Links"
5. Drag and Drop the second NE from the "Network View" window.
6. Select the style and color of the link. To delete a link select "None"
7. To confirm settings press "Apply" button.
3.2.4.2
Port connections (not supported by hiT 7080)
A port connection represents a physical connection between two Ports of two

different network elements. Creating a port connection object in TNMS CT means
only to create a presentation for this physical wire at TNMS CT. The only
precondition for the creation of a port connection at TNMS CT is, that the network
elements and the ports of the network elements at both ends of the port connection
are supported by TNMS CT.
In order to create a port connection, complete the following steps:
1. Select (RMB) the source NE and from the opened context menu "Port
Connections".
2. "Port Connections" window is opened and all ports of this NE are now displayed
there.
3. Select the destination NE and drag it into the right area. In case of an internal
port connection, simply drop the same NE here. All ports of this NE are now
displayed there.
4. Select one source and sink port on each side. If they are matching, the
Connection buttons in the toolbar are activated. You can use a filter function to
limit the displayed port connections.
5. Press one of the Connection buttons in the toolbar to create a port connection.
One or more arrows between the previously selected ports indicate the created
port connection. The created port connection will be highlighted.
32
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
1
2
Fig. 19 Creating a link
5
4
1
2
Fig. 20 Creating a port connection
FT52424EN02GLA1
33
Operating terminal
Port connection list

The Port Connection List displays automatically updated information about all
existing port connections.
To get a "Port Connection List":
1. From the "Main Menu" of the "Main Window" select "View -> Port Connection
List...".
2. "Port Connection List" is opened.
3. By right-clicking in the list, you can activate a context menu.
Delete port connection

In order to delete a port connection, complete the following steps:
1. In the opened "Port Connections List" window select (RMB) port connection to
be deleted.
2. From Pull Down menu select "Edit Port Connection...". "Port Connection"
window is opened.
3. In the "Port Connection" window related port connection will be highlighted and
between the ports arrows represent the connection.
4. Press the "Disconnect" button to delete the port connection.
The deleted port connection also disappears from the Network View if it there are not
any more port connections between the same NEs.
34
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Fig. 21 Port connection list
2
3
Fig. 22 Delete port connection
FT52424EN02GLA1
35
Operating terminal
3.2.5
Administrating NE Write Access
TNMS CT only administers write access to managed network elements which

support this feature via the context menu of the NE icon on the network map.
Typically the TNMS C is the Network Management station which has the "Write
Access" to the NE. It has a higher priority than a TNMS CT. That means TNMS C
has to release "Write Access" to a NE before it can be requested by TNMS CT.
TNMS C also has the capability to enforce "Write Access" to a NE at any time.
Consequently, the TNMS CT operator also has quite limited control over external
LCT write access.
You can administer the NE write access via:
Network View NE context menu Access Control menu item
Release Write Access
Allow other LCTs to get write access on the selected NE
Request Write Access
Get write access on the selected NE unless any other LCT or TNMS C has write
access on it
3.2.6
Resynchronize Data
Sometimes SNMP controlled NEs (like hiT7080) cannot forward the complete data to
the TNMS CT. To be sure that you have the latest status updates and alarms
available at the Graphical User Interface you can start a new NEC initialization for the
selected network element via:
Network View NE context menu Resynchronize Data
36
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
TNMS-CT
A
TNMS-CT
B
Fig. 23 Administrating NE Write Access
Fig. 24 Resynchronize Data
FT52424EN02GLA1
37
Operating terminal
3.2.7
Requesting the alarm information
The alarms detected inside a manageable network will be reported by the NE's as
alarm messages to the TNMS CT. To view and process the current and historical
alarms massages the "Alarm List" and "Alarm Log" files can be displayed.
Alarm list
A complete list of currently raised alarms or list of the alarms related to a selected
object can be opened via the following menu entries:
1. From the "Main Menu" select "Fault Alarm List...".
or
2. From "Network View" from NE context menu select "Alarm Alarm List...".
3. By clicking (RMB) into an alarm entry you can open a popup menu. Choose
(LMB) "Filter" entry to open the "Filter settings" window. Here you can set your
Filter configuration to filter the entries in the alarm list according to your
requirements.
Alarm Log
A complete historical alarm list or historical alarm list related to a selected object can
be opened via the following menu entries:
1. From the "Main Menu" select "Fault Alarm Log...".
or
2. From "Network View" from NE context menu select "Alarm Alarm Log...".
3. By clicking (RMB) into an alarm entry you can open a popup menu. Choose
(LMB) "Filter" entry to open the "Filter settings" window. Here you can set
your Filter configuration to filter the entries in the alarm log according to your
requirements.
38
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Fig. 25 Requesting alarm list
Fig. 26 Requesting alarm log
FT52424EN02GLA1
39
Operating terminal
Alarm statistic window

The Alarm Statistic window displays the alarm statistics for the selected network
element. For each severity a counter for acknowledged alarms (Ack) and for
unacknowledged alarms (Unack) is displayed.
The right column shows a summary of both acknowledged and unacknowledged
alarms for each alarm severity. The bottom line shows a summary of all
acknowledged alarms, unacknowledged alarms and the total for both categories. The
alarm severity is not taken into account here.
The alarm statistics correspond to the Alarm List with a filter for the network element
in question.
Fig. 27 Alarm statistic window
40
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
3.2.8
Terminating a TNMS CT session
A TNMS CT session is terminated when the user logs off. All windows are closed
and access is only provided to the login function. The TNMS CT Server process will
not be stopped.
1. To terminate TNMS CT user session press "Logoff" button.
2. To confirm the logoff, in the opened "Message" window press "OK" button.
Fig. 28 Terminating a TNMS CT session
FT52424EN02GLA1
41
Operating terminal
3.3
Connecting to the Network Element
There are two ways of connecting to the SURPASS hiT 70xx series network
elements these are either TNMS CT or CLI (Command Line Interface)
TNMS CT
TNMS CT provides the user with a purpose built graphical user interface in which
operators can monitor and configure a selected network element. Each different type
of Network Element has a specially built Element Manager application that must be
installed with TNMS CT. Additionally corresponding License Keys needs to be
imported into the TNMS CT SW to enable functionality. Connection is established
by connecting the network interface on the TNMS CT PC to the management
interface on the network element directly or via a L2 switch using an Ethernet patch
cable.
The operator is required to configure IP setting on the TNMS CT PC based on the
settings within the network element before communication can be established. This is
done within windows and not the TNMS CT software.
Alternatively TNMS CT can connect to a NE also via a routed network. IP settings
on the TNMS CT PC must be done appropriate dependent on the local
environment.
Using an existing Data Communication Network DCN an operator can connect either
to the local NE or to a remote NE.
TIP
DCN setup is also required as a prerequisite at the TNMS CT. This is typically a
task the network administrator takes care of.
CLI (Command Line Interface)
Unlike TNMS CT the CLI access does not require any special software to be
loaded onto an operator's machine. The operator can use Hyper Terminal which
comes standard with Microsoft Windows or any similar program. The operator does
not have to know any IP settings to establish a connection to a NE.
Connection is established by connecting a straight serial cable between the Com Port
on a PC and the Console Port on the network element.
CLI will provide the operator with a menu operated system which will allows them to
view and configure communications settings for the NE. The operator can
communicate with the local network element or remotely communicate with a network
element using a telnet program instead of Hyper Terminal.
42
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
CLI and TNMS-CT

TNMS-CT
Client
WAN / Internet
WAN / Internet
TNMS-CT
Server
TNMS-CT
LAN
CLI
TNMS-CT
RS232
RS232
CLI
hiT 7080
hiT 7080
STM-16
BSHR/2
STM-64
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
MSP 1+1
hiT 7080
MSP 1+1
hiT 7080
Fig. 29 CLI and TNMS-M LCT
Connectivity to NEs
Element management functions are executed via the element
managers (LCTs) provided by the TNMS-CT system
TNMS-CT
The
The Console
Console or
or CLI
CLI mode
mode provides
provides the
the
service
service technician
technician with
with aa basic
basic
communications
communications settings
settings access
access to
to
the
the network
network element
element
Support
Support for
for 11 NE
NE at
at aa time
time
No
No special
special software
software required
required to
to connect.
connect.
Can
Can remote
remote telnet
telnet to
to neighboring
neighboring NEs
NEs
when
when no
no routing
routing protocol
protocol established
established
Network interface
(Ethernet)
Metro-Access
STM-1/4/16
CLI
Serial line interface
(RS232)
Fig. 30 Connectivity to NEs
FT52424EN02GLA1
43
Operating terminal
3.3.1
CLI / console access
To establish a connection to the network element using the CLI method:

1. Connect Cable between the Com Port (E.g. COM1) on PC and the Console Port
on Network Element. The Console port can be found on the System Controller
(SC) faceplate for SURPASS hiT 7080.
2. Start the Hyper Terminal (or similar) program.
Hyper Terminal can be found by selecting Start Programs Accessories
Communications Hyper Terminal
3. Give the Hyper Terminal session a name to save configuring the settings next
time it is used.
TIP
The same Terminal Settings are used for all the SURPASS hiT Products (7080, 7060
HC, 7060, 7030, 7035, 7025, 7020).
4. In the "Connect to" pop up window select the serial communication port which
you are going to use for your serial line communication (e.g. COM1) and hit the
"OK" button.
5. Configure the selected serial port with the following settings.
Bit Rate
9600
Data Bits
Parity
None
Stop Bits
Flow Control
None
TIP
For this step, just press the "Restore Defaults" button.
6. Again hit the "OK" button.
44
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Fig. 31 Creating a hyper terminal session
Fig. 32 Define serial port communication settings
FT52424EN02GLA1
45
Operating terminal
HyperTerminal: CLI Login

1. Press ENTER twice to refresh the login screen of the network element
2. Enter the User name and password
The Default settings are
User Name
Password
Access Level
root
<blank>
Administrator
op
<blank>
Operator
3. The Main Menu is displayed. A user can press any of the letters (displayed in
brackets) to select that item.
46
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
7
6
Fig. 33 Hyper terminal: CLI Login
Fig. 34 Main menu display
FT52424EN02GLA1
47
Operating terminal
3.3.1.1
Configuring TNMS CT IP settings
Prior to starting to communicate with a network element, the TNMS CT IP Address

must be configured.
You must know the following information.
An available IP address in the Management Port IP Subnet for TNMS CT

Management Port Subnet Mask
Management Port IP Address
This Information can be obtained by using the CLI connection.
The information above assumes that the connection is going to be established via a
L2 Switch, Hub or Ethernet Cross over cable but not a router. If connecting via a
router the operator will have to consult with the Network Administrator to obtain the
required address information. See Fig. 35 and Fig. 36 for examples.
48
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
TNMS CT: Local Connection

Node IP Address: 172.16.8.61
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.255
TNMS-CT
Network: 10.10.6.0/28
Network: 10.10.6.0/28
L2 Switch
IP Address: 10.10.6.11
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240
Default Gateway: 10.10.6.10
Management Port IP Address: 10.10.6.10

Management Port Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240
Default Gateway: X.X.X.X
Fig. 35 TNMS CT: Local Connection
TNMS CT: Connection via Router

IP: 10.10.5.161
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
IP: 10.10.6.1
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240
Node IP: 172.16.8.61

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.255
TNMS-CT
Network:
Network:
10.10.5.0/24
10.10.5.0/24
Network: 10.10.6.0/28
Network: 10.10.6.0/28
Router
IP: 10.10.5.254
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
L2 Switch
Management Port IP: 10.10.6.10

Management Port Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240
Fig. 36 TNMS CT: Connection via Router
FT52424EN02GLA1
49
Operating terminal
TNMS CT: IP Address configuration

1. Either Right Mouse Click on My Network Places and select Properties or
Select Network connections from Start Settings Network Connections
2. Right Click on your network interface and select Properties
3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) and press Properties
4. Select Use the following IP address and fill in the IP settings as listed below
IP Address: Must be in the same subnet as Management Port IP Address but not
the same as any other IP address. Consider the Subnet Mask value!.
Subnet Mask: Must be the same as Management Port Subnet Mask.
Default Gateway: Must be the same as Management Port IP Address.
5. Click OK to apply these settings. Configuration complete.
TIP
To check connectivity between the LCT and the Network Element try pinging the
Management Port IP Address and the Node IP Address.
50
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Fig. 37 IP settings
Fig. 38 IP settings
FT52424EN02GLA1
51
Operating terminal
52
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Exercises
FT52424EN02GLA1
53
Operating terminal
54
FT52424EN02GLA1
Operating terminal
Exercise
Title:
CLI and TNMS CT Connection
Objectives:
The participant is able to setup a connection to the NE using CLI and TNMS CT
Pre-requisite:
TNMS CT and HyperTerminal installed.
Task
Ask the instructor which is the element assigned to your team.
Using the HyperTerminal establish a serial connection with the element assigned to
your team and write down the data you find out
NE Type
NE IP Address
MGMT IP Address
MGMT Net Mask
Using the data from the table, configure the Ethernet card on your TNMS CT PC
and connect to the NE assigned using TNMS CT LCT.
FT52424EN02GLA1
55
Operating terminal
56
FT52424EN02GLA1
Contents
1
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
4
hiT 7080 LCT GUI

SDH cards and ports configuration
Configuring a new card
Delete a card
NE / Card / Port Properties Configuration
Cross connections configuration
Cross connections principles
Types of cross connections
Timeslot numbering
Cross connection management
NE Resource Usage Statistics
Exercise
FT52425EN02GLA1
3
7
8
10
14
21
22
24
26
28
62
65
FT52425EN02GLA1
hiT 7080 LCT GUI
RACK
Cross
Connect
Tools
Ethernet
SN64
Level
2
OIS16D
LCT
hiT 7080
2Mb
CL
7020
System
DOC
Training
Doc
Fan
Nokia
Siemens
Networks
Fig. 1
FT52425EN02GLA1
Once the TNMS CT Network Element management (hiT7080 LCT) program has
successfully loaded the operator is presented with the Main operation window. This
consists of:
Title and Main Menu Bar.

Alarm Summary.
Chassis View.
The Chassis View window gives a graphical representation of the subrack. It details
card and slot information such as:
Name of card.
Display any configurable ports that may be on the card.
List the Card operation state.
List the Port operation state.
It is possible to configure and identify faults in the equipment by using various
different menus.
Main Menu
The main menu lists general functions that are not related to one specific card or
port. Some examples are Protection, Communications, Performance monitoring
Context menus
By right clicking a certain component of the chassis, the specific context menu
opens. There are three levels for context menus:
Chassis Menu
Via the chassis menu NE specific operations may be carried out. Examples are:
Verify NE properties or Refresh Chassis
Card Menus
The Card menu lists items that are specific to the selected card. An example is
creating cross connections from the Cross connection card
Port Menus
The Port menu lists items that are specific to the selected port. An Example is Port
configuration which allows configuring laser shut down.
TIP
Items in the context menu change based on which component is selected in the
chassis view.
FT52425EN02GLA1
LCT Main Menu

Chassis Main Menu
Context Menu
Physical port on
card
Card Operational
State
Card description
Alarm summary
Fig. 2 hiT7080 LCT GUI description
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
SDH cards and ports configuration
Fig. 3 Second row for SDH/PDH cards
FT52425EN02GLA1
2.1
Configuring a new card
The SURPASS hiT 7080 Network Elements have a built in plug and play feature
whereby the system controller automatically configures a new card when it is inserted
into the sub-rack. There is no manual configuration of cards available. During the
configuration of the new card, the card will be displayed into the slot and the card
status "Initializing" is displayed at the bottom of the card in the LCT window. Once
the configuration has been successfully completed, the card status is changed to
"Active". Fig. 4 shows Slot 4 during the initialization phase.
The alarms for all the ports of the newly configured card will not be supervised nor
displayed until a signal is applied to the relevant port.
The possible card statuses are:
Initializing: the hardware / software of the card is being initialized (after being
inserted into the chassis or while a cold reboot is taking place).
Active: the card has been recognized by the system and it is working properly.
Operational: the same meaning as Active. This status shows only up on core
cards with redundancy option (switch matrix). In case of both of the cards are
equipped, the one in the working status will also show an "Active" status while the
protection one will show "Standby" (Temporary note: This state is not displayed in
hiT 7080; just Active/STBY).
Faulty: the card is not working. An internal failure has been detected.
Mismatch: this label will be appear in case of equipping a card not supported on
the chassis (the card type is not the expected one; e.g. after card replacement
another card type is inserted into slot without having deleted the old one
administratively).
Absent: the card has been removed from shelf or there is a cold reboot ongoing.
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 4 Card initialization
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2.2
Delete a card
Prior to deleting a card from the sub rack the following preconditions must be
fulfilled.
Removal of all traffic cross-connections related with the card.

Removal of card / ports from protection schemes.
Removal of related ports from synchronization sources list.
Physical removal of the card from sub rack.
The following slides demonstrate the removal of an SDH card from Slot 4.
1. Fig. 5 shows the card operating normally "Active" in the sub rack. The
operator should check that all preconditions have been fulfilled prior to perform
the physical removal of the card.
2. Card should be physically removed from the sub rack. The LCT will display
"Absent" in red color at the bottom of the card once it has been physically
removed.
10
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 5 Normal card state operation
Fig. 6 Card physically removed from sub-rack
FT52425EN02GLA1
11
3. Right mouse click on the card showing the "Absent" status and select the
"Delete Card" option on the pop-up menu.
Note that the "Delete Card" option is only available in the pop up menu when the
card has been physically removed from the sub rack.
4. Click the "OK" button to confirm the deletion of the card.
5. A "Card has been deleted successfully" message will be displayed once the
system has done it. Once more click the "OK" button to confirm.
12
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 7 Deleting a Card
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
2.3
To configure or view the NE / card / port properties carry out the following steps:
1. Open the Chassis context menu and select "NE Property Configuration".
2. The "NE Property Configuration" window will open. Most of the configurable
parameters displayed in this window are set at time of commissioning and should
not be changed without good reason.
3. Double click in one of the desire card displayed in the Card List.
4. The corresponding "Card Property Configuration" window will open.
TIP
The content of the "Card Property Configuration" window will vary depending on
the selected card type
5. It is possible to configure some of the parameters in this window, like "Card
Label" or "Card Description" which contain descriptive text about the card.
6. Click either the "Apply" or "OK" button. The "Apply" button will keep the "Card
Property Configuration" window open. The "OK" button will close the "Card
Property Configuration" window.
7. In the lower half of the window the "Port List" is displayed. From here there is
possible to get an overview about the most important port parameters.
14
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 8 Open NE / Card Properties window
5
3
6
3
Fig. 9 Open NE / Card Properties window
FT52425EN02GLA1
15
8. To view or configure port parameters double click the respective entry in the
Port List.
9. The corresponding "Port Property Configuration" window will open.
TIP
The content of the "Port Property Configuration" window will vary depending on
the selected port type.
10. It is possible to configure some of the parameters in this window, like :
Port Label: contains descriptive text about the port

Port Mode: can be set to
Auto Mode: if the LOS defect clears or does not exist, the port mode is
automatically changed to Monitor; if the LOS defect keeps existing, the mode also
stays as Auto mode and the port mode performs the same function as the Non
Monitor mode.
Monitor: port supervision is enabled.
Non-monitor: port supervision is disabled.
Port Admin Mode: can be set to

Enabled: administratively enabled (Up); on optical port needs to be enabled to
restart the Laser.
Disabled: administratively disabled (Down); at optical port also the Laser will be
shut down.
Auto Laser Shutdown: can be set to

Yes: administratively enable Automatic Laser Shutdown mechanism for this port.
No: administratively disable Automatic Laser Shutdown mechanism for this port.
Port ALS Mode: can be set to

No Command: if ALS is administratively enabled Automatic Laser Restart
mechanism will take place for this port.
Manual Restart: if ALS is administratively enabled a Laser Restart pulse with a
duration of 2 seconds will be sent
Manual Test: if ALS is administratively enabled a Laser Test pulse with a duration
of 90 +/- 10 seconds will be sent
Working Mode: only available for 8 x STM-4/-1 and can be set to

STM-4: this port operates at 622 Mbps
STM-1: this port operates at 155 Mbps
11. Click the "Apply" button to activate all the changes.
16
FT52425EN02GLA1
10
11
10
Fig. 10 Port Properties Configuration window
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
12. In the lower half of the window the "Port status" is displayed. From here you can
obtain information about the current port status and most important monitoring
parameters of optical SFP/XFP modules.
13. Additional SFP/XFP specific information can be displayed. Click the "Advanced
button". An information window will pop up.
14. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
15. The "Advanced Port Status Information" window will pop up.
TIP
The content of the Advanced Port Status Information window will vary depending on
the selected SFP/XFP type.
18
FT52425EN02GLA1
14
15
13
12
Fig. 11 Advanced Port Status Information window
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
20
FT52425EN02GLA1
Cross connections configuration

SN64
Fig. 12 Cross-connections
FT52425EN02GLA1
21
3.1
Cross connections principles
In order to connect internally signals on different interface modules cross

connections have to be configured. These connections are initiated by software
command and allow easy configuration, reconfiguration or deletion.
The number and possible types of cross connections depends on the switching
capacity of the NE.
Generally, cross connections can be created between:
Line interface and line interface.

Line interface and tributary interface.
Tributary interface and tributary interface.
22
FT52425EN02GLA1
Cross-connection overview
SWITCHING MATRIX(S)
Line to line
connection
Line
Trib
Trib
Trib
Line
Trib
Line to tributary
connection
Tributary to tributary
connection
Fig. 13 Cross connection principles
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
3.2
Types of cross connections
The cross connections are established with the aid of "Termination Points" TP. As
an example, a TP could be a VC-4 on an ETH interface (TTP) or a VC-4 on a SDH
interface (CTP). Each termination point characterizes the source TP A or the sink TP
Z of the connection. There are four different types of cross connections that can be
set up:
Unidirectional cross connection:

In a unidirectional cross connection, unidirectional termination points are linked
together. Traffic flows from TP A (source) to TP Z (sink). The other direction
remains unused
Bi directional cross connection:

In a bi directional cross connection, bi directional termination points are
linked together. Traffic flows from TP A to TP Z and vice versa.
Loop back cross connection:

In a loop back cross connection, the source and the sink of the termination point
are linked in a loop. (TP A and TP Z are the same termination point)
Broadcast cross connection:

A broadcast cross connection is a special arrangement of a number of
unidirectional cross connections that have the same "source" termination point.
In that sense, there are several different TP Z linked with the same TP A.
Broadcast cross connections are only possible without protection.
24
FT52425EN02GLA1
Cross-connection types
Bidirectional
cross connection
SWITCHING MATRIX(S)
Line
Trib
Trib
Trib
Line
Trib
Unidirectional
cross connection
Broadcast
cross connection
Loopback
cross connection
Fig. 14 Cross connection types
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
3.3
Timeslot numbering
Over time three different numbering systems have been developed and used to refer
to different virtual containers within a STM signal. The 3 most popular ones are Time
Slot Numbering, Tributary Numbering and KLM numbering.
Timeslot Numbering is a number between 1 and 63 representing the physical order in
which the VC-12 are multiplexed within a VC-4.
Tributary Numbering is a number between 1 and 63 representing the "logical" order
(according to G.707 mapping) the VC-12 containers are mapped into a VC-4, it's a
graphical order instead a physical one.
K,L,M numbering gives the VC-12 location, related to a TU-3, TU-2, TU-12 within a
VC-4.
Different equipment use different numbering systems to number the VC-12
containers within a VC-4.
Tributary Numbering is used in a SMA Release 1, SMA Release 2, SMA1-K, TNMS.
K,L,M Numbering is used in SMA Series 4, SURPASS hiT 7070, 7050.
The SURPASS hiT 7080 can use either the Tributary Numbering or the K,L,M
numbering.
WARNING
When interworking between different SDH equipment, it should be made clear
which numbering system is being used, to ensure signals are connected
correctly.
26
FT52425EN02GLA1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1
VC4 Column
Number
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Time Slot
1 22 43 4 25 46 7 28 49 10 31 52 13 34 55 16 37 58 19 40 61
Tributary
4
P
O
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
VC4 Column
Number
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Time Slot
2 23 44 5 26 47 8 29 50 11 32 53 14 35 56 17 38 59 20 41 62
Tributary
K
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
VC4 Column
Number
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
Time Slot
3 24 45 6 27 48 9 30 51 12 33 54 15 36 57 18 39 60 21 42 63
Tributary
K
Fig. 15 TU-12's physical position in a VC-4
TUG3 #1
TUG2 #1
TUG2 #2
TUG2 #3
TUG2 #4
TUG2 #5
TUG2 #6
TUG2#7
TUG3 #2
TUG3#3
22
43
23
44
24
45
1
(1,1,1)
2
(1,1,2)
3
(1,1,3)
22
(2,1,1)
23
(2,1,2)
24
(2,1,3)
43
(3,1,1)
44
(3,1,2)
45
(3,1,3)
25
46
26
47
27
48
4
(1,2,1)
5
(1,2,2)
6
(1,2,3)
25
(2,2,1)
26
(2,2,2)
27
(2,2,3)
46
(3,2,1)
47
(3,2,2)
48
(3,2,3)
28
49
29
50
30
51
7
(1,3,1)
8
(1,3,2)
9
(1,3,3)
28
(2,3,1)
29
(2,3,2)
30
(2,3,3)
49
(3,3,1)
50
(3,3,2)
51
(3,3,3)
10
31
52
11
32
53
12
33
54
10
(1,4,1)
11
(1,4,2)
12
(1,4,3)
31
(2,4,1)
32
(2,4,2)
33
(2,4,3)
52
(3,4,1)
53
(3,4,2)
54
(3,4,3)
13
34
55
14
35
56
15
36
57
13
(1,5,1)
14
(1,5,2)
15
(1,5,3)
34
(2,5,1)
35
(2,5,2)
36
(2,5,3)
55
(3,5,1)
56
(3,5,2)
57
(3,5,3)
16
37
58
17
38
59
18
39
60
16
(1,6,1)
17
(1,6,2)
18
(1,6,3)
37
(2,6,1)
38
(2,6,2)
39
(2,6,3)
58
(3,6,1)
59
(3,6,2)
60
(3,6,3)
19
40
61
20
41
62
21
42
63
19
(1,7,1)
20
(1,7,2)
21
(1,7,3)
40
(2,7,1)
41
(2,7,2)
42
(2,7,3)
61
(3,7,1)
62
(3,7,2)
63
(3,7,3)
TU12 #1
TU12 #2
TU12 #3
TU12 #1
TU12 #2
TU12 #3
TU12 #1
TU12 #2
TU12#3
Code
Timeslot Number
Tributary Number
K, L, M Number
Example
53
33
(2,4,3)
Fig. 16 Timeslot, tributary and KLM numbering
FT52425EN02GLA1
27
3.4
Cross connection management
The procedure for configuring cross connections is identical for all switching levels.
Different level termination points are used, depending on the configuration of the
selected card.
3.4.1
Listing existing cross connection's (CC)
A list of all existing cross connections or a filtered list of them can be seen by:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Cross Connect
Management. A blank "Cross connect Management" screen will appear.
This screen is split into 2 areas, the top area (Conditional Settings) is a cross
connection filter, which allows to display just a specific cross connections
according with the selection.
2. Cross connections can be filtered based on Card, Port, Cross connection
level (Capacity), Direction, Circuit label or in which LOCC the cross
connections are stored. To filter the information set the desired filter.
3. Press the "Query" button at the bottom of the window to display the results of
the current filter. If the conditional settings remain untouched all cross
connections will be displayed
All cross connections in the SURPASS hiT 7080 have two (or more in case of
broadcast CC) termination points labeled A and Z. In the case of bi directional
cross connections the order in which they appear does not matter (traffic flows in
both directions). In case of unidirectional and broadcast cross connection, care has
to be taken in order to select as A point the signal source and as Z point the signal
destination (since in this case, traffic only flows from A to Z).
TIP
To view all cross connections in the NE, do not change any field into the
"Condition Settings" area and just click in "Query" button.
28
FT52425EN02GLA1
3
2
Fig. 17 Cross connections list: modify filter settings
Fig. 18 Cross connections list: filtered list
FT52425EN02GLA1
29
3.4.2
Preparing the multiplex structure
SURPASS hiT 7080 has a high order switch matrix which supports VC-4-64c, VC4-16c, VC-4-4c and VC-4 connections (note that virtual concatenated cross
connections are built as multiple connections) and has a low order switch matrix
which supports VC-3 and VC-12 connections. Even when all this CC levels are
supported, the default structure on all SDH interfaces is prepared to carry only
unstructured VC-4's.
If a non default payload structure is required within a STM-N signal, then the payload
structure has to be first configured manually on the interface. If this is not done, the
required CC can not be created. All modifications are made by selecting the menu
option Configuration TP multiplex structure.
3.4.2.1
Converting payload structure to AU-4-4c
This option is only available on STM-4, STM-16 and STM-64 cards.

1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration TP Multiplexing
Structure. The same option can be achieved, clicking with the right mouse
button over the desire port and select the option TP Multiplexing Structure.
2. This will bring up a popup box where the desired SDH card and port can be
selected.
3. Press the "Query" button to continue.
4. The "TP Multiplex Structure" popup window will expand to show the current
structure for the selected port. By right clicking on an item and selecting "Expand
All", the complete structure will be expanded. By pressing the "Plus" sign, only
the item next to the sign will be expanded.
TIP
If any container inside of the port (AU-4's, TU-3's or TU-12's) is used for a cross
connection or protection, the icon related to the container on the left side will have the
orange color and will use a pyramid as a icon, means is used. Balloon blue color
means, that the container are available for cross connections and can be used to
change the structure of the AU-4s. Finally the square icon and green color means
that the container is being used for MS-SPRing protection.
5. Select the required AUG-4 (Administrative Unit Group) to be modified into an
AU4-4c with the left mouse button.
6. Right click to display the menu. On the menu select "Mapping AUG-4 AUG-4
To AU-4-4c".
30
FT52425EN02GLA1
1
2
Fig. 19 Opening TP Multiplexing Structure windows
Fig. 20 Converting Structure to AU-4-4c I
FT52425EN02GLA1
31
WARNING
The Right Click menu will change based on the item currently highlighted.
7. Press the "Apply" button to modify the structure. An information box will indicate
the process is being applied.
8. Once the structure has been modified successfully a dialog box will show up.
Press the "OK" button to confirm.
32
FT52425EN02GLA1
Structure not
applied yet
8
7
3
Fig. 21 Converting Structure to AU-4-4c II
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33
3.4.2.2
Converting payload structure to AU-4 Clear Channel
This procedure has to be performed in order to convert a contiguously concatenated

VC-4-nc into a VC-4 structure. No cross connections should be present using the VC4-nc to be reconfigured. The following procedure shows how to un-structure a VC-44c:
Structure.
2. This will bring up a popup box where the desired card and port can be selected.
4. The TP Multiplex Structure popup box will expand to show the current structure
of the selected port. Right click on an item and select "Expand All" and it will
expand the complete structure. Press the plus sign to expand only the item next
to the plus sign.
34
FT52425EN02GLA1
1
2
Fig. 22 Opening TP Multiplexing Structure windows
5
6
Fig. 23 Converting Structure to AUG-1 I
FT52425EN02GLA1
35
5. Select the required AUG-4 (Administrative Unit Group) to be modified into AUG-1
structure.
6. Right click to display the menu. Select "Mapping AUG-4 AUG-4 To AUG-1".
7. Press the "Apply" button to modify the structure. An information window will pop
up to indicate the process is being applied. This takes some time.
36
FT52425EN02GLA1
Structure not
applied yet
8
7
Fig. 24 Converting Structure to AUG-1 II
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37
3.4.2.3
Converting payload structure to TU-12
The default payload structure for STM signals in the 7080 is not prepared for VC-12
connections. Before creating a VC-12 cross connection using that payload, the TU12 structure has to be prepared.
The procedures to structure the VC-4 into VC-12's are:
Structure.
2. This will bring up a popup box where should be select the desire card and port.
4. The TP Multiplex Structure popup box will expand to show the current structure
of the selected port. Right click on an item and select "Expand All" and it will
expand the complete structure. Press the plus sign to expand only the item next
to the plus sign.
38
FT52425EN02GLA1
1
2
Fig. 25 Payload structure to TU-12 I
5
6
Fig. 26 Payload structure to TU-12 II
FT52425EN02GLA1
39
5. Select the required AU-4 (Administrative Unit Group) to be modified with the left
mouse button.
6. Right mouse click to display the drop down menu. Select Mapping AU-4 AU-4
To TUG-3. Note the Structure will change to reflect the selected item.
WARNING
The Right Click menu will change based on what item is currently highlighted
(background color in blue) and not the item that may have been right clicked.
TIP
TUG-3 is a Tributary Unit Group Level 3. This means, it is a group of 7 TUG-2, each
of them consists of 3 TU-2 containers. It is not a TU-3 container for a 34/45Mb PDH
Signal
7. Press the "Apply" button to modify the structure. An information window will pop
up to indicate the process is being applied. This takes some time.
40
FT52425EN02GLA1
Structure not
applied yet
8
7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41
3.4.2.4
Converting payload structure to TU-3
A TU-3 Structure can be mapped from a previously created TUG-3 container

consisting of TU-12 signals.
1. Select Configuration TP Multiplexing Structure.
2. This will bring up a popup box where the required SDH Card and Port to be
configured can be selected.
3. Press Query to Continue.
4. Select the TUG-3 to be modified with the left mouse button.
5. Right mouse click to display the menu.
Select Mapping TUG-3 TUG-3 To TU-3.
Note the Structure will change to reflect the selected item.
42
FT52425EN02GLA1
1
2
Fig. 28 Payload structure to TU-3 I
Structure not
applied yet
FT52425EN02GLA1
43
6. Press the Apply button to apply modification.

After pressing Apply an information box will indicate the process is being applied.
7. A dialog box will be displayed when successfully completed.
TIP
This structure is created by each TUG-3 and will no be reflected in to the other two
TUG-3. If the intention is create three TU-3 inside of one AU-4, these steps must be
done into the other two TUG-3.
44
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 30 Payload structure to TU-3 III
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
45
3.4.3
Creating a bi directional VC-12 cross connection
A bi directional VC-12 cross connection is the most common cross connection

in use. In order to create such a connection:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Cross-Connect
Management. A blank Cross connect Management screen will appear.
2. Press the "Create" button at the bottom of the window to open the "Create
Cross-Connect" window.
3. Select "Direction" as "Bidirectional" (default selection).
4. Assign a "Circuit Label" to the cross connection (optional). This may help to
identify the cross-connection at later point in time.
5. Select "Capacity" as "VC-12" (default selection).
6. Select the "A" Card and the "Z" Card.
46
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 31 Cross Connection Management window
7
6
Fig. 32 Create a cross connection I
FT52425EN02GLA1
47
7. Select a Port for TP "A" and then a port for TP "Z".

8. Select the two TU-12 containers to be connected. The selected TU-12s are
shown with a blue background color.
TIP
If the desired TU-12 container is not listed, check if the TP has been used for another
cross connection or SNCP protection. First check if the payload structure is the
correct one. All this can be done by analyzing the "TP Multiplexing Structure".
9. Press either the "Apply" or "OK" button. The "Apply" button will keep the
"Create Cross connection" window open after the cross connection has
been created. The "OK" button will close the "Create Cross connection"
window.
An information box will be displayed during the time taken by the network element
to create the cross connection.
10. After the cross connection has been successfully created, a dialog box will
show up informing about the result. Press the "OK" button to confirm.
TIP
The above procedure can be followed for creating cross connections at any level.
Instead of selecting the "Capacity" parameter as "VC-12" select the desired level as
"VC-3", "VC-4", "VC4-4c", "VC4-16c" or "VC4-64c".
48
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 33 Create a cross connection II
8
7
10
Fig. 34 Crete a cross connection II
FT52425EN02GLA1
49
3.4.4
Creating multiple cross connections
Multiple cross connections can be created at the same time between the same
cards. This may be useful when creating Virtually Concatenated Ethernet services or
multiple TU-12/VC-12 services.
Follow the directions given above but instead of selecting one termination point (step
8) hold down either the CTRL or SHIFT key and select multiple termination points.
CTRL will allow the selection of non sequential points whereas SHIFT allows the
selection of sequential points.
WARNING
Note: When the equipment creates the cross connection it will connect the
top two selected points and then the next two selected points and so on up to
the end. It will not connect the points in the order they were selected.
50
FT52425EN02GLA1
Multiple selection
using Ctrl button
Multiple selection
using Shift button
Fig. 35 Creating a multiple cross connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51
3.4.5
Creating a broadcast (point to multipoint) cross

connection
A Broadcast cross connection consists of a series of unidirectional cross

connections where the root point (TP A) is the same but the leaf endpoints (TP Z) are
different.
TIP
The maximum number of leaf endpoints for a single P2MP connection at the HOCC
switching matrix is 16.
Each cross connection must be created separately.
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Cross Connect
Management. A blank "Cross connect Management" screen will appear.
Cross connect" window.
3. Select Direction as "Unidirectional".
4. Assign a "Circuit Label" to the cross connection. This may help identify the
cross connection at a later point in time.
5. Select the correct "Capacity" for the cross connection.
6. Select the desired "A" Card and "Z" Card.
TIP
In this case the direction has to be taken in account. The signal source point should
be selected in the "A" column. The signal destination point should be selected in the
"B" column.
7. Select the "A" Port (or List All) and the "Z" Port
8. Select the two containers desired to be connected.
9. Press the "Apply" button to create the cross connection. An information box
will be displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the cross
connection.
10. Once the cross connection has been successfully created, a dialog box informs
about the results. Press "OK" to finish (the first unidirectional connection is
created).
52
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 36 Creating a Broadcast cross-connection I
4
5
7
8
7
10
Fig. 37 Creating a Broadcast cross connection II
FT52425EN02GLA1
53
In order to create the other leaves for the broadcast cross connection:
11. Keep the "A" point the same and modify the "Z" Card, Port and Termination
Point.
12. Select the two containers and press "Apply". An information box will be
displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the next cross
connection.
13. Press the "OK" button in the dialog box that shows up.
Repeat step 11, 12 and 13 until all leave endpoints have been added to the
Broadcast cross-connection.
TIP
All cross connections that are part of a broadcast cross connection will be listed
as a P2MP (Point to Multi Point) type of connection.
54
FT52425EN02GLA1
11
13
12
Fig. 38 Adding a second leg to the broadcast cross connection
Fig. 39 Listing cross connections: P2MP cross connections details
FT52425EN02GLA1
55
3.4.6
Creating a loopback cross connection
A loopback cross connection is a special type of unidirectional cross connection

where the source and the destination points are the same. To create a loopback
cross connection:
Management. A blank "Cross-connect Management" screen will appear.
Cross-connect" window.
3. Select "Direction" as "Unidirectional".
4. Assign a "Circuit Label" to the cross - connection. This may help identify the
cross connection at a later point in time.
5. Select the "Capacity" for the cross connection.
6. Select the same card for "A" Card and "Z" Card
7. Select the same port for "A" Port and "Z" Port
8. Select the same container in both columns (A and Z).
9. Press either the "Apply" or "OK" button. After this an information box will be
displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the cross
connection.
10. Press "OK" in the dialog box that shows up to finish.
56
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 40 Creating a Loopback cross-connection
4
5
6
7
6
8
6
10
9
6
Fig. 41 Creating a Loopback cross connection
FT52425EN02GLA1
57
3.4.7
Modifying the Cross connection
The existing cross connections list into the 7080, there is possible to have access
to the details of the cross connections and make few modifications.
To have access to the details of the cross connection, go to the Cross-Connection
Management window, select the desire cross connections. The background entry
will turn to blue color and click the option View. New window will pop-up with the
details of the cross connection. All the fields are in a grey color means no possibility
to change anything.
There is another way to have access to the same window, just click twice over the
desire cross connection.
In order to modify the cross connection, select the desire cross connection and
click in the option Modify. The Modify Cross-Connection window will pop up. The
available fields are Type (this topic will be discusses later) and Circuit Label.
58
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 42 Cross connection details
Fig. 43 Cross connection modifications
FT52425EN02GLA1
59
3.4.8
Deleting a cross connection
If a cross connection is no longer required it can be deleted in order to make the

bandwidth available for future connections. For deleting a cross connection:
Management. A blank Cross-connect Management screen will appear.
2. Set the filter as required at the top of the window to limit the list of cross
connections.
3. Press the "Query" button to display the filtered list of cross connections.
4. Select the cross connection to be deleted (the background color changes to
blue)
5. Press the "Delete" button.
6. A dialog box will be displayed warning about the consequences of the deletion
and asking for confirmation. Make sure the connection to be deleted is the right
one and press "Yes". A waiting dialog will be displayed during the time it takes
for the network element to delete the cross connection.
7. An information dialog box will be displayed once the cross connection has been
successfully deleted. Press the "OK" button to finish.
60
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 44 Deleting a cross connection I
Fig. 45 Deleting a cross connection II
FT52425EN02GLA1
61
3.5
NE Resource Usage Statistics
To get an overview about used and unused resources (TPs) in the NE:
1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration NE Resource
Usage Statistics
2. In the top section of the "Resource Usage Statistics" window a list with the
following information is displayed:
Card: Displays all the cards in use.

Port: Displays all the ports of the corresponding cards.
Usage Percentage: Displays the usage of this port in percentage.
3. Select one port
4. The details of selected port will be listed in the CTP Usage Detail list.
CTP Mapping: Displays the TP mapping.

Used or Not: Displays the CTP's state.
62
FT52425EN02GLA1
Fig. 46 NE Resource Usage Statistics
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52425EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
63
64
FT52425EN02GLA1
Exercise
FT52425EN02GLA1
65
66
FT52425EN02GLA1
Exercise 1
Title:
Objectives:
The participant shall be able to recognize the different cards populated in the NE
chassis
Pre-requisite:
Pre-read chapter
Task
Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address
of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig,
NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/
255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.
I am working with the team:
student _ _
Name of the real NE: ____________________

NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Fig. 47 Start up information
Start Network Element Management for your NE. Check if you have "Write
Access".
Open the "NE Properties Configuration" window.

Open the "Card Properties Configuration" window for the STM-4/1 in Slot 17
Open the "Port Properties Configuration" window for Port #5.
Open the "Advanced Port Status Information" window.
FT52425EN02GLA1
67
Query
Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "NE Properties
Configuration" window.
NE Type:
NE Name:
Slot
Number
68
Card Type
Nr. of Ports
Available
Slot
Number
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
10
27
11
28
12
29
13
30
14
31
15
32
16
33
17
FAN
Card Type
Nr. of Ports
Available
FT52425EN02GLA1
Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "Card Properties
Configuration" window form the card inserted on Slot #17.
NE Type:
NE Name
Slot #
Card Type
Port Number
Port Type
Port Mode
Admin Status
Port Status
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "Port Properties
Configuration" window.
NE
Card
Port #
Port Type
Port Label
Port Mode
Port Admin Mode
Auto Laser Shutdown
Port ALS Mode
Working Mode
Operating Status
FT52425EN02GLA1
69
Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "Advanced Port
Status Information" window.
Card Name
Port Name
Operation Status
Laser Bias Current
Received Laser Power
Transmitted Laser Power
Transceiver Temperature
Nominal Bit Rate
Laser Wavelength
Link Length
SFP Vendor Name
NSN Part number
Vendor's Manufacturing Date
FINISH.
Ive got it !
Fig. 48 End of exercise 1
70
FT52425EN02GLA1
Exercise 2
Title:
Cross Connection Management
Objectives:
The participant is be able to list, create, modify and delete cross connections
Pre-requisite:
Pre read the information given in this chapter.
Task 1
student _ _

NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Fig. 49 Cross connection start up information
In this part of the exercise each team has to create a 2 Mbps bi-directional crossconnection.
In the MUX plan shown below find the NE assigned to your team, just have a look
about the cross-connection data for the connection to be created.
FT52425EN02GLA1
71
VC-12 Bidirectional Cross Connections: MUX Plan

2 Mbps Electrical
DDF
DDF
STM 4
STM 4
STM 4
Slot Slot Slot Slot

LC13
16#5
#5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot

#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C
C
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2
Slot
C
Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #1
Leipzig Extension Shelf

172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2
STM 16
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1
STM 4
C
C
1
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8
STM 4
LC 1
#1
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2
STM 16
2 Mbps
Electrical
LC1
#1
C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1
Slot Slot Slot Slot 2

Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8
Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot

C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
1
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16

17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4
Wuppertal Extension Shelf
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4
STM 4
DDF
Fig. 50 MUX Plan
According with the assigned team, please create the following cross-connections:
72
FT52425EN02GLA1
Team
Type
Capacity
Label
TPA
TPZ
Slot 3. Port # 1
Bidirectional
VC-12
CC1
LC1. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Bidirectional
VC-12
CC2
AU-4 # 2
Slot 25. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Bidirectional
VC-12
CC1
2
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
VC-12
VC-12
CC2
CC1
3
Bidirectional
VC-12
CC2
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port #1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port #1
Bidirectional
VC-12
CC1
AU-4 # 1
Slot 25. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Bidirectional
VC-12
CC2
LC 1. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Query
After creation of all cross-connections contact your instructor. He will prove the
functionality of the created path using a PDH/SDH test set.
Delete all cross-connections, which have been created. Check the result of
deleting with the "Cross-Connect Management" window.
FT52425EN02GLA1
73
Task 2
In this part of the exercise each team need to create a VC-12 broadcast cross
connection.
In the MUX plan shown below find the NE assigned to your team and look down to
find in the table, the relevant cross-connection data for the connection to be
created.
VC-12 Broadcast Cross Connections: MUX Plan

DDF
2 Mbps Electrical
STM 4
STM 4
STM 4
Slot Slot Slot Slot

LC13
16#5
#5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 25 #1 16 C
C
7080
Slot
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2
Slot
C
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #5

172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2
STM 16
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1
STM 4
C
C
1
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8
STM 4
LC 1
#1
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2
STM 16
2 Mbps
Electrical
LC 1
#1
C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080
1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
C
10.10.6.40
16 #8
C
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 25 #1 17 #8
STM 16

17 #8 25 #5 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
STM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4
Fig. 51 MUX Plan
According with your team, please create the relative cross connections required
74
FT52425EN02GLA1
Team
Type
Capacity
Name
TPA
TPZ
Slot 16. Port # 1.AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Unidirectional
VC-12
BR
LC1.
Slot 17. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 2. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Unidirectional
VC-12
BR
Slot 25.
Slot 17. Port # 1. AU-4 #1
Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 2. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot2. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Unidirectional
VC-12
BR
Slot 25.
Slot16. Port # 1. AU-4 #1
Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 3. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Unidirectional
VC-12
BR
LC1.
Slot 17. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 2. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Query
After creation of all cross-connections contact your instructor. He will prove the
functionality of the created path using a PDH/SDH test set.
Delete all cross connections, which have been created. Check the result of
FT52425EN02GLA1
75
Task 3
In this part of the exercise each team has to create a loopback cross connection.
In the MUX plan shown below find the NE assigned to your team and find out the
relevant cross connection data for the connection to be created.
VC-12 Loopback Cross Connections: MUX Plan

DDF
2 Mbps Electrical
DDF
STM 4
STM 4
STM 4
Slot Slot Slot Slot

LC13
16#5
#5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C
C
7080
Slot
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2
Slot
C
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #5

172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1
STM 16
C
C
1
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8
STM 4
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2
STM 4
LC 1
#1
STM 16
2 Mbps
Electrical
LC 1
#1
C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080
7080 Wuppertal
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080
Landau
(LD)
1
7080 Landau (LD)
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
C
10.10.6.40
16 #8
C
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16

17 #8 25 #5 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4
STM 4
DDF
Fig. 52 MUX Plan
According with your team, find in the table the required cross connection:
76
FT52425EN02GLA1
Team
Type
Capacity
Name
TPA
TPZ
Unidirectional
VC-12
LB
LC 1. Port # 1
LC 1. Port # 1
Unidirectional
VC-12
LB
LC 1. Port # 1
LC 1. Port # 1
Query
Delete all cross connections, which have been created. Check the result of
FINISH.
Ive got it !
FT52425EN02GLA1
77
78
FT52425EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Protection Features
Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
3.1
3.2
4
4.1
4.2
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
6
Protection features general

Protection architectures
Switching types
Protection mode
Traffic Protections
MSP Line protection
Path protection
Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring (MS-SPRing)
Equipment protection
1:N card protection
1+1 card protection
Protection support for SURPASS hiT 7080
Traffic Protection
Card protection
Protection configuration
MSP 1+1
MSP 1:N
Path protection
E1; E3/DS3 and STM-1 Electrical Card Protection
HOCC card protection
LOCC Card protection
System Controller Card Protection
Exercise
FT52426EN02GLA1
3
4
8
12
15
16
16
18
25
26
26
29
30
30
33
34
44
56
70
78
80
82
85
Protection Features
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Protection features general
Drop & Continue

Path Protection
VC Trail Protection
SNCP
Traffic Protection
Card Protection
SDH
Network
Line Protection
Self Healing Ring Protection
Multiplex Section Protection
Single Ended MSP
Double Ended MSP
MS-SPRING/2
Fig. 1 Protection features
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
1.1
Protection architectures
1+1 protection architecture

In the 1+1 architecture type, a protection transport entity (e.g. a multiplex section) is
dedicated as a backup facility for the working transport entity with the normal traffic
signal bridged onto the protection transport entity at the source end point of the
protected domain.
The normal traffic on working and protection transport entities is transmitted
simultaneously to the sink end-point of the protected domain, where a selection
between the working and protection transport entity is made based on some
predetermined criteria, such as signal fail and signal degrade indications.
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
1+1 protection
protection in
in fault-free
fault-free case
working
Normal
Norma l
protection
Selector
Selector
Permanent
Bridge
Pe rmanent
Bridge
Fig. 2 1+1 protection in fault-free case
1+1
1+1 protection
protection in case
case of
of fault
fault
SWITCH
SWITCH
working
Normal
Norma l
protection
Selector
Permanent
Bridge
Selector
Pe rmanent
Bridge
Fig. 3 1+1 protection in faulty case
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
1:N protection architecture

In the 1: N architecture type, 1 dedicated protection transport entity is a shared
backup facility for N working transport entities. The bandwidth of the protection
transport entity should be allocated in such a way that it may be possible to protect
any of the n working transport entities in case the protection transport entity is
available.
When a working transport entity is determined to be impaired, its normal traffic signal
must be transferred from the working to the protection transport entity at both the
source and sink end-points of the protected domain. It is noted that when more than
1 working transport entities is impaired, only 1 normal traffic signal can be protected.
The bridge can be realized in two manners:
broadcast bridge
selector bridge
With "broadcast bridge" connectivity (Fig. 4) the normal traffic signal is permanent
connected to the working transport entity and occasionally to the protection transport
entity (Fig. 5) also.
With "selector bridge" connectivity the normal traffic signal is connected either to the
working transport entity, or the protection transport entity. Interworking between the
two options is guaranteed.
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
1:n protection without extra traffic in fault-free case
Null signal (0)
Null signal (0)
Normal (1)
Working (1)
Normal (1)
Normal (2)
Working (2)
Normal (2)
Normal (n)
Working (n)
Normal (n)
Extra (n+1)
Protection (0)
AIS
Extra (n+1)
AIS
Selector
Selector
Bridge
Bridge
Fig. 4 1:n protection architecture with broadcast bridge and without extra traffic (fault free case)
1:n protection without extra traffic in case of fault

SWITCH
SWITCH
Null signal (0)
Null signal (0)
Normal (1)
Normal (1)
Working (1)
SWITCH
Working (2)
Normal (2)
Normal (n)
Working (n)
Normal (n)
Extra (n+1)
Protection (0)
Normal (2)
SWITCH
AIS
Extra (n+1)
AIS
Selector
Selector
Bridge
Bridge
Fig. 5 1:n protection architecture with broadcast bridge and without extra traffic (fault case)
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
1.2
Switching types
Unidirectional switching
If a fault occurs on the worker line, the signal is switched to the protection line. In
case of single ended switching, only the affected transmission direction is switched.
In the opposite direction, the signal remains on the worker line. This protection
switching scheme is also known as "Single ended protection switching".
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Unidirectional switching: Worker line used

worker
protection
Fig. 6 Principle of unidirectional switching: Worker line used
Unidirectional switching: Protection line used
worker
SWITCH
protection
Fig. 7 Principle of unidirectional switching: Protection line used
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Bi directional switching
If a fault occurs on the worker line, the signal is switched to the protection line. In
case of bi directional switching, both transmission directions are switched to the
protection line. This protection switching scheme is also known as "double ended
protection switching".
10
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Bi-directional switching: Worker line used
worker
protection
Fig. 8 Principle of bi directional switching: Worker line used
Bi-directional switching: Protection line used
worker
SWITCH
SWITCH
protection
Fig. 9 Principle of bi directional switching: Protection line used
FT52426EN02GLA1
11
Protection Features
1.3
Protection mode
Non revertive protection switching

If a fault occurs on the working line, the traffic is switched to the protection line. In
non revertive protection mode, the data signal will remain on the protection line
after the fault has been cleared. The switch back to the original line will only occur if a
new fault occurs on the protection line, or by operator command.
Revertive protection switching

In case of a failure, the data signal will be switched to the protection line. Once the
fault has been cleared, and the line is working in a fault free state, the traffic will be
switched back to the worker line. Before this switching-back occurs, the worker line
must remain fault free for at least some minutes. This period is called "Wait Time to
Restore" and can be configured individually.
12
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Non-revertive protection mode

fault clearance
clearance
WORKER Path
error free worker
switch over
PROTECTION Path
Fig. 10 Principle of non revertive operation
Revertive protection mode

Wait-To-Restore
Periode
0 ... 30 min
fault clearance
switch over
PROTECTION Path
WTR
switch back
WORKER Path
error
e.g. SF
Fig. 11 Principle of revertive operation
FT52426EN02GLA1
13
Protection Features
14
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Traffic Protections
FT52426EN02GLA1
15
Protection Features
2.1
MSP Line protection
Duplicated lines in a multiplex section characterize line protection switching. On the

receiving side one of the two lines is selected from which to derive the signal. On
both lines, transmit side and receive side, two line ports have to be installed. The
signals transmitted on both lines are monitored. On the receiving side the switch card
selects, based on predefined switching criteria, which line signal will be passed within
the switching matrix.
2.2
Path protection
1+1 Path Protection, also named "Sub Network Connection Protection" (SNCP), is
implemented and activated at the cross connection level. Path protection can be
implemented in either linear or ring structures.
The data signal is transmitted over two different paths having the same starting and
ending termination points. At the ending termination point, the switchover criteria are
defined and evaluated. If the received signal on the worker path exceeds the quality
thresholds, the signal will be taken from the protection path. The criteria for switching
are laid down individually during configuration of the individual devices (evaluation of
the Path Overhead).
Using path protection, each data signal is transmitted twice: on the worker path and
on the protection path. Therefore additional transmission capacity must be provided
on the effected line connections.
Currently there are two ways to configure a SNCP, the so called Intrusive SNCP
(SNCP/I) and the Non Intrusive SNCP (SNCP/N).
SNCP/I
When an Inherent SNCP protection is configured on an NE, the switching criteria
used to go from the working path to the protection one are signal fails, for LO VC the
failures would be TU-LOP and TU-AIS or an internal reaction (SSF) related to a
higher order failure.
SNCP/N
In the case of Non Intrusive SNCP additionally to the Signal Failures mentioned
previously, the information inside the VC POH is considered. So BIP error codes,
path trace mismatches and signal label incongruence could also be a motive to
switch over. In order to support the SNCP/N protection, the CTPs have to be able to
detect alarm conditions related with the VC POH.
16
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Line Protection
worker card
worker line
switching matrix
protection line
protection card
Fig. 12 Principle of line protection
Path Protection
Working Path
Protection Path
Switch
only one direction shown
Definition of
Switching Criteria
Fig. 13 Principle of path protection
FT52426EN02GLA1
17
Protection Features
2.3
Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring (MSSPRing)
MS-SPRing is also known as Bi directional Self Healing Ring (BSHR) in other

Siemens products
The MS-SPRing configuration consists of several network elements whose line
interfaces are connected to each other in a form of a ring. During normal operation,
path switching generally occurs via the shortest path in order to involve the least
number of network elements.
If a fault in the multiplex section occurs the data will be looped back at both ends of
the faulty section via the protection path. Therefore half of the ring capacity must be
reserved for the protection path.
18
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
n . . . Normal Traffic
Worker
Protection
Fig. 14 Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring Normal state
Worker
Protection
n . . . Normal Traffic
Fig. 15 Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring Activated State
FT52426EN02GLA1
19
Protection Features
2.3.1
2 Fiber MS-SPRing ring
2 Fiber MS-SPRing rings require only two fibers for each span of the ring. Each fiber
carries both working channels and protection channels. On each fiber, half the
channels are defined as working channels and half are defined as protection
channels.
The normal traffic carried on working channels in one fiber is protected by the
protection channels traveling in the opposite direction around the ring (See Fig. 16).
This permits the transport of protected normal traffic and unprotected traffic been
carried in the protection channels. If a fault occurs the unprotected traffic will be lost
and only the protected traffic carried. Only one set of overhead channels is used on
each fiber.
2F MS-SPRing rings support ring switching only. When a ring switch is invoked, the
normal traffic is switched from the working channels to the protection channels in the
opposite direction.
20
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
2F-MS-SPRING
STM # 1-8
STM # 1-8
worker
protection
worker
protection
Fiber 1
STM # 9-16
STM # 9-16
STM # 1-8
STM # 1-8
worker
protection
worker
protection
Fiber 2
STM # 9-16
STM # 9-16
Fig. 16 2F-MS-SPRing
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
Protection Features
2.3.2
Non pre emptible Unprotected Traffic (NUT)
With ITU T recommendation G-841 there is a feature called Non pre emptible
Unprotected Traffic (NUT). This allows the selection of VC-4 contains which will be
protected by MS-SPRing and which containers will not be protected.
With No NUT containers selected VC-4 # 1 to VC-4 # 8 carry traffic and are all
protected by VC-4 # 9 to VC-4 # 16. If VC-4 # 3 is selected as a NUT container it will
not be protected by MS-SPRing should a fault occur, but it may be protected by
another protection method such as SNCP. Should this occur this will also free VC-4 #
11 from protecting VC-4 # 3, so extra unprotected traffic can be carried in this
container.
22
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
VC-4 # 16
VC-4 # 9
VC-4 # 8
VC-4 # 1
Non pre-emptible Unprotected Traffic (NUT)
VC-4 # 16
VC-4 # 11
VC-4 # 9
VC-4 # 8
VC-4 # 1
VC-4 # 3
Without NUT
With VC-4 # 3 as a NUT Container

Protected Container
Protecting Container
Unprotected Container
Fig. 17 NUT
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Protection Features
24
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Equipment protection
FT52426EN02GLA1
25
Protection Features
Equipment (module) protection is designed to react in case of card failures. Two

types of module protection are supported 1:N Card Protection and 1+1 Card
Protection.
3.1
1:N card protection
The 1:N card protection feature allows the protection of one or more modules by one
additional protection card. In the event of a module failure, the traffic of the first
module, which fails will be taken over by the protection card.
3.2
1+1 card protection
For 1+1 card protection, an additional module is inserted for protection. This module
only protects the traffic of one specified card in case of different events like card
failure or operator switch.
The signals are offered to both the working and the protection module. Both modules
distribute the signal to the next operation card (e.g. the switching network CC) which
then chooses one of the two signals, based on predetermined criteria.
26
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
1:N Card Protection
1:N
protection module
working modules
Fig. 18 1:N card protection
1+1 Card Protection
working
workingmodule
module
1+1
1+1
protection
protectionmodule
module
working
module
module
switch
switch
protection
module
switching
network
Fig. 19 1+1 card protection
FT52426EN02GLA1
27
Protection Features
28
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Protection support for SURPASS hiT 7080
FT52426EN02GLA1
29
Protection Features
4.1
4.1.1
Traffic Protection
MSP protection
In this SURPASS hiT 7080 equipment, 1+1 and 1:N MSP (NMax=14) line protection is
available for all SDH interfaces. Worker and Protection ports can be either located on
the same card or different cards. There is no limitation regarding the position where
the Worker and Protection ports have to be equipped. It is not necessary to configure
Worker and Protection ports on neighbor cards.
The protection can be configured in order to work with bidirectional or unidirectional
switching. Revertive or Non-Revertive operation is possible.
4.1.2
MS-SPRing
2 Fiber MS-SPRing is supported at STM-64, STM-16 and STM-4 levels. In order to

increase de bandwidth utilization it is possible to take advantage of low priority traffic
and NUT functionalities.
In case of multiple ring failure operation, the system builds automatically the
corresponding squelch tables using the information given by the configured cross
connections. Squelch tables manual configuration is also possible.
4.1.3
Path protection
SNCP protection at all levels is supported.

The protection can be configured as Revertive and Non-Revertive.
The protection can be configured as SNCP/I or SNCP/N.
When the system is configured to work with SNCP/I, it means, only reacting in case
of signal fail (HP-SSF or LP-SSF). The SSF alarm arises in case of defects in the
signal server layer (e.g. LOS, LOP, AIS, etc).
In order to support SNCP/N, the non intrusive monitoring has to be enabled
(monitored status) on the CTP. In this case besides the SD and EXC BER, the
system can also react in case of TIM.
4.2
Card protection
The following cards support equipment protection in the equipment
HOCC comprising high order switch matrix and timing protection.

LOCC comprising low order switch matrix.
SC system controller card.
E1 and STM-1 E cards
30
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Summary Traffic protection

hiT 7070
hiT 7060
HC
hiT 7060
hiT 7050
CC
hiT 7050
FP1
hiT 7035
hiT 7030
1+1 MSP
STMSTM1,4,16,64 1,4,16,64
STM1,4,16,64
STM1,4,16
STM-1,4,16
STM-1,4
STM1,4,16
STM-1,4
STM1,4,16
STM-1,4
1:1 MSP
STM1,4,16,64
1:N MSP
STMSTM1,4,16,64 1,4,16,64
STM4,16,64
STM-4,16
STM-16
STM-4,16
STM-4
STM-4,16
STM-4
All line
rates
All line
rates
All line
rates
All line
rates
All line
rates
All line
rates
All line
rates
hiT 7080
BSHR-2
STM4,16,64
STM16,64
BSHR-4
SNCP
(LO,HO)
STM16,64
hiT 7025 hiT 7020
All line
rates
All line
rates
All line
rates
Fig. 20 Summary Traffic Protection
Summary Protection Features
hiT 7080
hiT 7070
STM-1,4,16,64
port with MSP
1+1
hiT 7060
HC
hiT 7060
STM-1,4,16,64
port with MSP
STM-1,4,16port
with MSP
VC-4 Matrix
VC-4 Matrix
VC-3/-12
Matrix
VC-3/-12
Matrix
hiT 7050
CC
hiT 7050
FP1
STM-1,4,16
port with MSP
STM-1,4,16,64
port with MSP
VC-4 Matrix
VC-4 Matrix
VC-3/-12 Matrix
VC-3/-12 Matrix
CLU
CLU
CLU
VC-3/-12
Matrix
PWR
PWR
CLU
SC
PWR
PWR
34/45 Mbps
card
34/45 Mbps
card
34/45 Mbps
card
STM-1e card
STM-1e card
STM-1e card
VC-4 Matrix
PWR
STM-1,4 port
with MSP
PWR
hiT 7035
hiT 7025
STM-1,4 port
with MSP
STM-1,4 port
with MSP
VC-4 Matrix
VC-4 Matrix
VC-3/-12
Matrix
VC_3/-12
Matrix
CLU
CLU
PWR
PWR
34/45 Mbps
card
34/45 Mbps
card
STM-1e card
STM-1e card
2M card
2M card
34/45 Mbps
card
1:N
STM-1e card
2M card
STM-1e card
2M card
2M card
2M card
Fig. 21 Summary Protection Features
FT52426EN02GLA1
31
Protection Features
32
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Protection configuration
FT52426EN02GLA1
33
Protection Features
5.1
5.1.1
MSP 1+1
Create MSP 1+1
In order to configure a MSP 1+1 protection:

1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration MSP Management.
2. Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups created on the network
element, if there is any. You can set "Query Conditions" to filter for specific
protection groups.
3. Press the "Create" button to create a new MSP line protection.
4. The "Create Linear MSP Group" window will open.
5. The changeable options available in the basic information window pane are:
MSP Mode: Set the MSP mode as MSP 1+1

Active Mode: Enable by default. This field is used only for 1: N protection.
Port type: Select the bandwidth of the port from the drop-down list (e.g. STM-4)
Group label: Every MSP requires always a Protection Group Label which
identifies it from other created MSP protections on the Network element. Text
String with max. 64 characters. Must not contain "space" character.
Operation Mode: either Revertive or Non Revertive.

Switch Direction: either Unidirectional Switch or Bidirectional Switch.
Working Channel number: The working channel number is displayed in the text
box.
Extra traffic: Select Enable or Disable from the drop-down list when the MSP
mode is set as MSP 1:N
Wait to Restore: only available if Revertive operation has been selected. A value
between 60 seconds and 720 seconds (300 seconds by default).
6. Select "Card" and "Port" for "Protection Multiplex section".

7. Select "Card" and "Port" for "Working Multiplex section".
8. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to create the MSP group. An "Information"
window will pop up.
TIP
There is no restriction which card / port is selected as working and which one is
selected as protection. The ports can be on the same card or on any other as
long as the STM level is the same
9. Press the "OK" button to confirm.
34
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
2
1
Fig. 22 Creating MSP 1+1 protection I
7
1
8
3
9
Fig. 23 Creating MSP 1+1 protection II
FT52426EN02GLA1
35
Protection Features
WARNING
MSP can not be created if there are cross connections on the protection line.
TIP
If the TP Multiplex Structure is different for the worker and the protection line, a
notifying message box will be displayed. If Yes is clicked on the message box, the
worker line structure will be applied to the protection line.
WARNING
If the DCCs in the protection line are activated, the system will deactivate them
before the protection is created. The NE will ask for a confirmation. Check on
the remote NE if the DCC in the worker line are activated and up in order to
prevent loosing communication before deactivating the protection line DCCs.
36
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 24 Creating MSP 1+1 protection III
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37
Protection Features
5.1.2
View / Modify MSP

1) Press the "Query" button to get a list of all MSP lines configured on the network
element. The list will show the status of existing MSP groups.
2) To get detailed information about worker and protection lines select the desired
MSP group from the list. The background line color will turn to blue.
3) Click the "View/Modify" button. The "View/Modify MSP Property" window will
pop up.
4) It is possible to change the following parameters:
Wait to Restore
Group Label
5) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change the configuration. An "Information"
window will pop up.
6) Click the "OK" button to confirm.
38
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 25 View/Modify MSP I
5
3
7
6
3
3
4
Fig. 26 View/Modify MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1
39
Protection Features
5.1.3
Switch MSP
1) Open the "MSP Management" window. To switch between the working and
Protection lines, select the desired MSP.
2) Click the "Switch" button to open the "Switch MSP" window.
3) The "Switch MSP" popup window will display:
Current Highest Switch Request

Switch Status
Operator Command Card/Port
External command
Working and Protection port signal status.
4) To switch between worker and Protection lines select the "Operator Command
Card/Port" from list.
5) Select the "External Command" from list. The options available are:
Clear: Clearance for automatic switching (internal switch request).

Lockout of Protection (LP): Forced fixed through connection on the operating
path by "locking" (not be used) the protection path.
Forced Switch: Forced fixed through connection on the other path.

Manual Switch: Through connection on the other path, if this is free from errors.
Remain on the existing path if there is found errors.
6) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change configuration.

7) Note that if a higher priority command is pending you will get a corresponding
message and your last command will not be executed.
TIP
Each item in the Command drop down menu has a priority. The list is sorted with the
highest priority first. E.g. it is not possible to change from "Lockout" to "Force" or
"Manual" Switch without first clearing the current command.
40
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 27 Switch MSP I
3
7
6
7
Fig. 28 Switch MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1
41
Protection Features
5.1.4
MSP Deletion

2. Press the "Query" button to get a list of all MSP groups configured on the
network element.
3. Select the desired MSP to be deleted from list.
4. Press the "Delete" button
5. Press the "Yes" button to confirm.
42
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 29 Delete MSP I
5
4
Fig. 30 Delete MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1
43
Protection Features
5.2
5.2.1
MSP 1:N
Create MSP 1:N
In order to configure a MSP 1: N protection:

1) From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration MSP Management.
2) Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups already configured on the
network element, if there is any. You can set "Query Conditions" to filter for
specific protection groups.
3) Press the "Create" button to create a new MSP line protection.
4) The "Create Linear MSP Group" window will open. In the top of this window,
there are changeable options available in the basic information window pane:
MSP Mode: Set the MSP mode as "MSP 1:N"

Active Mode: Set to "Enable" to activate protection group
Port type: Select STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, or STM-64 from the drop-down list
Group Label: Every MSP line requires a Protection Group Label which identifies
it from other created MSP protections on the Network element. Text String with
max. 64 characters. Must not contain "space" character.
Operation Mode: always set to "Revertive"

Switch Direction: always set to "Bi directional Switch"
Wait to Restore: this field is only available if "Revertive" operation has been
selected. The input value is between 60 seconds and 720 seconds.
Extra Traffic: can be set to "Enable" disable if the protection port will be used for
extra-traffic or not.
5) Select "Card" and "Port" for "Protection Multiplex section".

6) Click "Add" button to add all the working ports in the "Working Multiplex
section".
44
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 31 Creating 1:N MSP protection I
5
4
6
Fig. 32 Creating 1:N MSP protection II
FT52426EN02GLA1
45
Protection Features
7) Select "Working Card" from list

8) Select "Working Port" from list
9) Select "Priority" from list
10) Repeat steps 6 to 9 for additional working ports into the working multiplex section.
11) Click the "Apply or Ok" button to create the MSP group.
12) Information windows will pop-up. Click the "OK" button to finish the MSP creation.
TIP
There is no restriction on which card / port is selected as working and which one is
selected as protection. The ports can be on the same card or on any other as long as
the STM level is the same
WARNING
If the DCCs in the protection line are activated, the system will deactivate them
before the protection is created. The NE will ask for a confirmation. Check on
the remote NE if the DCC in the worker line are activated and up in order to
prevent loosing communication before deactivating the protection line DCCs.
46
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
9
10
11
12
Fig. 33 Creating 1:N MSP protection II
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
47
Protection Features
5.2.2
View / Modify MSP

network element. The list will show the status of existing MSP groups.
3) To get detailed information about worker and protection lines select the desired
MSP group.
4) Click the "View / Modify" button. The "View / Modify MSP Property" window
will pop up.
5) As long as the MSP 1:N is in the Active Mode "Enable" it is possible to change
the following parameters:
Wait to Restore
Group Label
6) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change configuration. An "Information"
window will pop up.
48
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 34 View/Modify 1:N MSP I
3
6
7
7
4
Fig. 35 View/Modify 1: N MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1
49
Protection Features
8) Set "Active Mode" for the MSP 1: N to the "Disable".

9) Press the "Apply" button to change the configuration. An "Information" window
will pop up.
11) Now it is possible to modify the members of the existing MSP group. Select the
channel number you want to modify.
12) Select Working Card, Working Port or Priority column and select item from list.
13) It is also possible to add or remove Worker lines to and from the MSP group.
Select "Add" or "Delete" button correspondingly. In case you add a new worker
line to the group you need to define the Working Card, Port and Priority for the
new channel.
TIP
In case that the number of worker channels need to be reduced it must be done
sequentially deleting the channel with the highest number first. It is not possible to
delete any other channel selectively.
14) After making all the changes, there is mandatory to set Enable the Active Mode
of the protection
15) Once more press the "Apply or Ok" button to make your configuration changes
permanent.
16) An Information window will pop up. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
50
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
10
Fig. 36 View/Modify MSP III
14
Only the port with the highest
Channel number can be
deleted first
12
13
12
11
15
11
16
Fig. 37 View/Modify 1:N MSP III
FT52426EN02GLA1
51
Protection Features
5.2.3
Switch MSP
1) Open the "MSP Management" window and select the desired MSP, the
background color will turn to blue.
2) Click the "Switch" button to open the "Switch MSP" window.
3) The "Switch MSP" popup window will display:
Current Highest Switch Request

Switch Status
Current Signal State of Working and Protection lines
4) To switch between Worker and Protection lines select the "Operator command
Card/Port" from list.
5) Select the "External Command" you want to issue to the selected Card/Port
from list.
6) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change configuration.
7) Note that if a higher priority command is pending or you try to switch a lower
priority channel you will get a corresponding message and your last command will
not be executed.
TIP
highest priority first. E.g. it is not possible to change from "Lockout" to "Force" or
"Manual Switch" without first clearing the current command.
52
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 38 Switch 1:N MSP I
3
2
6
5
Fig. 39 Switch 1:N MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1
53
Protection Features
5.2.4
MSP Deletion

network element.
3) Select the desired MSP to be deleted.
4) Press the "Delete" button.
5) Click "Yes" button to confirm.
54
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 40 Delete 1:N MSP I
Fig. 41 Delete 1:NMSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1
55
Protection Features
5.3
5.3.1
Path protection
Create SNCP
TIP
In order to create a protected path, the worker path has to be created first.
Means is mandatory create the cross connection from the working path.
To create the protection path
1) Select Configuration Cross - Connection Management from the chassis
main menu. An empty window will appear.
2) Press the Batch Create SNCP button to add SNCP protection to a cross
connection.
3) Configure the SNCP behavior:
Capacity: VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12.
Direction: Bidirectional, Source, Sink. This refers to the CC type to be used, not to
the protection switching protocol. When source is selected, the CC is unidirectional
and this is the bridge end point. When Sink is selected, the CC is unidirectional
and this is the switch end point. When bidirectional is selected, the end point is
switch and bridge at the same time.
Restore Mode: Revertive, Non Revertive (only when Bidirectional direction is
selected).
Wait to Restore Time: only when Revertive operation is selected (the minimal
time is 60 seconds and maximum time is 720 seconds). 300 sec by default.
Label: SNCP protection name, this field is mandatory. No blank spaces are
accepted.
Hold of Time: Hold of Time is used when SNCP uses paths routed through
protected sections. The idea behind is to allow the section protection react before
trying a SNCP protection switching in case of a failure in the section layer.
Intrusive Mode:
a) SNC/I: the switching criteria used to go from the working path to the protection
one are signal fails (AIS and LOP), or the internal reaction (SSF) to a higher
order failure. SD is not used as criteria to switch over
b) SNC/N: additionally to the Signal Failures mentioned previously, the
information inside the VC POH is considered. So BIP error codes, path trace
mismatches and signal label incongruence are also reasons to switch over. In
order to support the SNCP/N protection, the corresponding CTPs alarm
monitoring has to be enabled.
4) Select the working point, Card and Port. The SDH card where the path is going to
be routed through has to be selected, not the path end point. Only cross
connected CTPs are shown on the card and port selected.
56
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 42 Creation of SNCP Protection I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57
Protection Features
Once the working CTP has been selected, the other cross connection member is
shown on the "Source/Destination TP" field.
5) Select the protecting card, port and CTP.
6) Press Apply or OK to add protection onto the unprotected cross connection.
7) There will appear a dialog window, where informs about the creation state of the
protection. When it finish, will appear an information window where informs the
successful of the protection. Press OK to go back to the Cross - Connect
Management window.
58
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Source TP will be displayed

when is selected the right
Working TP
6
2
Fig. 43 Creation of SNCP Protection II
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
59
Protection Features
5.3.2
View / Switch SNCP
To view and or switch a protected Cross connection:

1) Go to Configuration Cross - Connect Management.
2) Press Query button, to look all cross connections.
3) Select the desire protection (all the line will turn to blue background) and click in
View button. The "Detail of Cross Connection" window will open.
4) To obtain the current SNCP status and / or to issue maintenance commands click
the "Switch" button. The "SNCP Switch" window will pop up.
The following status information will be displayed:
Active Path
Current Request
Working Signal State
Protection Signal State
5) Choose maintenance command from list. The commands available are:
Clear: No operator command. System chooses working path when it is in normal
state. Wait to Restore time is not considered.
Lockout of Protection: the selected path is the working one. Protection is blocked
for this NE
Forced Switch to Working: selected path is working even been the path is failed
Forced Switch to Protection: selected path is protection even been the path is
failed
Manual Switch to Working: selected path is working if the signal is in normal
state.
Manual Switch to Protection: selected path is protection if the signal is in normal
state.
6) Click the "Apply" button to execute the command.
TIP
highest priority first. E.g. it is not possible to change from Lockout to Force or Manual
Switch without first clearing the current command.
60
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 44 View / Switch SNCP I
3
4
Fig. 45 View / Switch SNCP II
FT52426EN02GLA1
61
Protection Features
5.3.3
Modify SNCP Protection Properties
To modify the protection properties of an existing protected cross connection:

1. Select Configuration Cross - Connect Management. The Cross - Connect
Management window will pop-up.
2. Press Query button to get all cross connections.
3. From the list in the "Cross Connection Management" window select the
cross connection you want to modify.
4. Click the "Modify" button. The "Modify Cross Connection" window will pop
up.
5. Change the Protection properties as required.
6. Click "Modify" button to make your changes permanent. After completion of the
command an "Information" box will pop up.
7. Click on "OK" button in the "Information" box to confirm.
62
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 46 Modify SNCP Protection Properties I
7
5
6
4
Fig. 47 Modify SNCP Protection Properties II
FT52426EN02GLA1
63
Protection Features
5.3.4
Remove Protection from existing Protected Cross

connection
To remove protection from a protected cross connection:

protected cross connection you want to modify.
up.
3. Select Working or Protection channel which should be still used in the cross
connection.
TIP
Make sure, that the currently active path is the one which you still keep in your
configuration; otherwise a short traffic hit will occur.
4. Click the "Convert to CC" button to remove the other channel. A
"Confirmation" window will pop up.
5. Click the "Yes" button if you want to proceed with the action selected. An
"Information" window will pop up.
6. Click "OK" button to confirm.
64
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
1
3
2
Fig. 48 Remove Protection from existing Protected Cross-Connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
65
Protection Features
5.3.5
Add protection to existing Unprotected Cross

connection
To add a protection path to an unprotected cross connection:

unprotected cross connection you want to modify.
up.
3. Change the "Type" of cross connection to "Bidirectional Protected Tail End" or
"Bidirectional Protected Head End" as appropriate.
4. Configure "TP A Protection" or "TP Z Protection" respectively: Select Card,
Port and AU-4 number from list
5. Configure the Protection Properties as required.
6. Click the "Add Protection" button to add the protection path. An "Information"
window will pop up.
66
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
3
7
4
6
2
Fig. 49 Add protection to an unprotected cross-connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
67
Protection Features
5.3.6
Delete SNCP
To delete a protected Cross Connection:

1) From the list in the "Cross Connection Management" window select the
desire cross connection to be deleted.
2) Click the "Delete" button. A "Confirmation" dialog box will pop up.
3) Press "Yes" on the "Confirmation" dialog box. The cross connection will be
deleted (Progress is shown in separate window). An "Information" box will pop
up when the deletion is completed.
4) Press "Yes" on the "Information" box.
68
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 50 Deleting a protected cross-connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
69
Protection Features
5.4
5.4.1
E1; E3/DS3 and STM-1 Electrical Card Protection

Create card protection
In order to enable card protection for the E1; E3/DS3 and STM-1 cards, please follow
these procedures:
1. Go to Configuration EPG Management. A new window will pop up.
2. The windows show the existing protections. In order to create a new one, press
Create button.
In this new window there are several settings to select:
3. EPG type: Set the kind of card protection to enable: 1: N E1; 1: N E3DS3 or 1: N
STM-1E.
4. Revertive mode: Revertive by default to all the cases.
5. Protection card: According with the protection type, the equipment will detect
automatically if the card is placed into the protection slot and will displayed the
card into this field. In the case of STM-1 E, since there is two possible equipping
groups into the hiT 7080, select the right protecting card to enable the protection.
6. Wait to restore: Set the maximum recover time from 0 up to 720 seconds (the
default value is 300 sec).
7. Click in the arrows to select and/or remove the desire working cards from the list.
8. Click Create button to activate the protection.
9. An information window will pop up, mentioning about the successful EPG. Click
Ok to confirm.
10. A confirmation window will ask to enable the EPG. Press Yes button.
11. An information window will pop up, click Ok.
70
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 51 Create EPG I
3
4
6
5
7
6
9
10
11
Fig. 52 Create EPG II
FT52426EN02GLA1
71
Protection Features
5.4.2
Modify EPG
In order to modify one of the existing card protections, follow these steps:
1. Go to Configuration EPG Management. The EPG Management window will
pop up.
2. Select from the available list he desire protection. The background color will turn
to blue.
3. Click Modify to have access to the modifications. The Modify EPG window will
pop up.
4. Select the working card which will be excluded and click the left arrow button to
move it to the Available working card area.
5. Click Enable to enable the modified EPG and click OK to confirm the enabled
function.
6. Click Apply to confirm the modification and click Close to close the window.
7. The EPG is now configured as desired.
72
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 53 EPG modifications I
Fig. 54 EPG modifications II
FT52426EN02GLA1
73
Protection Features
5.4.3
Switching EPG
In order to switch EPG, please complete the following steps:

1) In the chassis main menu, select the Configuration EPG Management menu
item. The EPG Management window is opened.
2) Click Refresh to query all EPG information.
3) Select an item in the list by highlighting it in blue and click Switch to open the
EPG External Command window.
4) Select the desired item from the External Command drop-down list.
5) When Forced Switch to Protection or Manual Switch to Protection is selected, the
Working cards drop-down list is enabled. Select the desired working card.
6) Click Apply or OK to confirm the settings.
7) An information window will pop up with the successful of the action. Click OK to
close the window.
74
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
3
2
Fig. 55 Switching EPG I
5
4
6
5
Fig. 56 Switching EPG II
FT52426EN02GLA1
75
Protection Features
5.4.4
Delete Card Protection
In order to delete an EPG, please complete the following steps:

1) In the chassis main menu, select Configuration EPG Management menu
item. The Equipment Protection Group Management window is opened.
2) Click Refresh to query all EPG information.
3) Select an item in the list by highlighting it in blue and click Delete to delete the
EPG.
4) Click Yes in the Title_Confirmation window to confirm deleting.
5) Another Confirmation window will pop up to communicate that the system will
proceed to remove the protection. Press Yes to confirm.
76
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
4
3
2
5
2
Fig. 57 EPG deletion process
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
77
Protection Features
5.5
HOCC card protection
HOCC Switch Card protection is self configuring whenever there are two switch cards
inserted on the hiT 7080 subracks.
To identify which switch card is currently active an operator can look at the ACT LED
on the card. This can be seen either on the card or on the LCT program.
Switching between the two cards can be performed by:
1) Selecting Configuration CC 1+1 Protection HOCC 1+1 Protection from
the chassis main menu.
2) This window will display:
Current operation state of each card

Current Latch State of each card
Current Active Card
Current Request
3) An operator can perform a "Manual Switch" between the two cards by selecting
the appropriate Switch Request.
4) Press the "Apply" button.
The switching can be also performed by means of the hardware. The CC card has
two latches, at the top and at the bottom. They are used to extract/ insert the card on
the shelf and also to keep it fixed. There is an internal switch associated with the top
latch.
When the respective latch is pressed on the active the card it will initiate the
switchover. The reason for this is to detect that a card is going to be extracted and
make the changeover before it happens. This allows for shorter traffic interruptions.
78
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
1
Card status
2
3
4
Fig. 58 HOCC card protection: Software switching
Switch
Fig. 59 HOCC 1+1 card protection: Hardware switching
FT52426EN02GLA1
79
Protection Features
5.6
LOCC Card protection
LOCC Switch Card protection is self configuring whenever there are two or four
switch cards inserted on the hiT 7080 subracks.
To identify which switch card is currently active an operator can look at the ACT LED
on the card(s). This can be seen either on the card(s) or on the LCT program.
1) To look the actual state as well the bandwidth capacity configured into the 7080,
select Configuration CC 1+1 Protection LOCC Capacity Management
from the chassis main menu. This will display:
Current capacity of the LOCC

Current state of each card
From this menu as well is defined the bandwidth capacity for hiT 7080 will
have. To define what should be the total bandwidth, just select into the LOCC
capacity field the desire LO capacity.
2) Switching between the two cards can be performed by selecting Configuration
CC 1+1 Protection LOCC 1+1 Protection from the chassis main menu.
3) This will display:
Capacity of the LOCC

Last switch status
Switching status
Current state for the working card
Current state for the protection card
4) An operator can perform a "Manual Switch" between the two cards by selecting
the appropriate Switch Request.
TIP
LOCC1 are the Slot 5 and 6 (working slots), because the system see as one
card and LOCC2 are the Slots 7 and 8 (protection slots).
5) Press the "Apply" button.
The switching can be also performed by means of the hardware. The CC card has
two latches, one at the top and the other one at the bottom. They are used to extract/
insert the card on the shelf and also to keep it fixed.
When the respective latch is pressed on the active the card it will initiate the
switchover. The reason for this is to detect that a card is going to be extracted and
make the changeover before it happens. This allows for shorter traffic interruptions.
80
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Fig. 60 LOCC Capacity Management
3
4
Fig. 61 LOCC 1+ 1 Protection
FT52426EN02GLA1
81
Protection Features
5.7
System Controller Card Protection
SC 1 + 1 protection prevents SC functions from failing, including failure of software

tasks and MIB files, and guarantees at least one SC card is working in the normal
state and the system can provide continuous service.
To trigger the SC 1 + 1 protection switch, complete the following steps:
1) In the chassis main menu, select the Configuration SC 1+1 Protection menu
item. The SC 1+1 Protection window is opened.
2) The user can view the basic information of both SC cards.
3) If it is necessary to switch the SC card, the user can select the desired request
item from the Switch request drop-down list.
4) Click Apply or Ok to confirm the settings and close the window.
When the SC 1+1 switch is triggered, all the card with exception of the CC card will
turn into the fault state for several seconds, but is doesn't affect the traffic. After
several seconds, they will turn to the normal state.
TIP
There must be at least a six minutes interval between successive SC 1 + 1
switches to ensure system stability
82
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
3
2
1
4
Fig. 62 SC switching procedures
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52426EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
83
Protection Features
84
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Exercise
FT52426EN02GLA1
85
Protection Features
86
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Exercise 1
Title:
MSP 1+1 Configuration
Objectives:
Setup and check the MSP 1+1 protection
Pre-requisite:
Active NEs connected together via redundant lines
Task
student _ _

NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Fig. 63 Team Assignment
Each team has to configure a CC and a MSP according to the details given in Fig. 64
and the tables below.
Common MSP 1+1 configuration parameters for all teams:
MSP Mode: 1+1

Port Type: STM-4
Wait To Restore: 60 seconds
Group Label: One+One
Switch Direction: Bidirectional
Operation Mode: Revertive
FT52426EN02GLA1
87
Protection Features
Team specific parameters for Worker and Protection lines:

Team 1: NE Leipzig
Worker channel
Card
Port
Working Multiplex Section
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P01 (STM-4)
Protection Multiplex Section
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P01 (STM-4)
Team 2: NE Potsdam
Channel
Card
Port
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P02 (STM-4)
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P02 (STM-4)
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P01 (STM-4)
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P01 (STM-4)
Team 3: NE Landau
Channel
Card
Port
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P02 (STM-4)
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P02 (STM-4)
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P01 (STM-4)
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P03 (STM-4)
Team 4: NE Wuppertal
Worker channel
Card
Port
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P02 (STM-4)
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P03 (STM-4)
Now, according with your team, proceed to make the following cross connections
88
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Team
Type
Capacity
Label
TPA
TPZ
Slot 16. Port # 1
Bidirectional
VC-12
One+One
LC1. Port #1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
VC-12
VC-12
One+One
One+One
Slot 16. Port # 2
Slot 16. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16.Port # 2
Slot 16. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 2

4
Bidirectional
VC-12
One+One
AU-4 # 1
Slot 25. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
FT52426EN02GLA1
89
Protection Features
1 + 1 MSP: MUX Plan

DDF
2 Mbps
Electrical
DDF
STM 4
STM 4
1 + 1 MSP
Slot Slot Slot Slot

LC13
16#5
#5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C
C
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2
Slot
C
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #5

172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2
STM 16
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1
STM 4
C
C
1
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8
STM 4
STM 4
LC 1
#1
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2
1 + 1 MSP
STM 16
LC 1
#1
C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080
7080 Wuppertal
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
1
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
C
10.10.6.40
16 #8
C
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16

17 #8 25 #5 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4
1 + 1 MSP
STM 4
DDF
Fig. 64 1 +1 MSP: Mux Plan
Query
1. Configure the MSP and the cross-connection as stated above.
2. Once your partner teams have finished the configuration settings, check if the
MSP protection is using the configured working lines. This is indicated by a
"Normal" switch status.
3. Once checked the working line is carrying the traffic, make sure that there is no
switch request pending on the MSP. With the help of the instructor check the
normal traffic is up and running on the measurement instruments.
4.
Ask your instructor to shutdown the laser in one of the worker line section and
verify if the protection line is selected. Verify also if the measurement instrument
still has normal traffic. If this is not the case, find out the reason.
5. Ask your instructor to enable the laser again on the working line. Is the traffic
switched back to the working line? If not, find out the reason.
6. When all the previous steps have been completed, please delete all the MSP
protection and cross connections.
90
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
FINISH.
Ive got it !
FT52426EN02GLA1
91
Protection Features
Exercise 2
Title:
MSP 1:N Configuration
Objectives:
Setup and verify a MSP 1:N protection
Pre-requisite:
Active NEs connected together via redundant lines
Task
student _ _

NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Each team has to configure a CC and a MSP according to the details given in Fig. 67
and in the tables below.
Common MSP 1:N configuration parameters for all teams:
MSP Mode: 1:N

Port Type: STM-4
Wait To Restore: 60 seconds.
Group Label: One2N
92
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
Team specific parameters Worker and Protection lines:

Team 1: NE Leipzig
Worker channel
Working Card
Working Port
Priority
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P01 (STM-4)
High
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P01 (STM-4)
Low
Protection Card
Protection Port
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P03 (STM-4)
Team 2: Potsdam
Worker channel
Working Card
Working Port
Priority
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P02 (STM-4)
High
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P02 (STM-4)
Low
Protection Card
Protection Port
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P03 (STM-4)
Team 3: Landau
Worker channel
Working Card
Working Port
Priority
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P01 (STM-4)
High
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P01 (STM-4)
Low
Protection Card
Protection Port
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P03 (STM-4)
Team 4: Wuppertal
Worker channel
Working Card
Working Port
Priority
Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>
P02 (STM-4)
High
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P02 (STM-4)
Low
Protection Card
Protection Port
Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>
P03 (STM-4)
According with your team, proceed now with the following cross connections:
FT52426EN02GLA1
93
Protection Features
Team
Type
Level
Name
TPA
TPZ
Slot 16. Port # 1
TH
LC1. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Bidirectional
VC-12
TL
EXT
TH
Bidirectional
VC-12
TL
EXT
TH
Bidirectional
VC-12
TL
EXT
Slot 16. Port # 5
Slot17. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 7
Slot17. Port # 3
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 2
Slot 17. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU - 4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 2
Slot 16. Port #1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 3
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 2
Slot 16. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 2
Slot 17. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 17. Port # 3
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 2

TH
AU-4 # 1
Slot 25. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
4
Bidirectional
VC-12
TL
EXT
94
Slot 17. Port # 2
Slot 24. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 3
Slot 24. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
STM-1
Optical
1:N MSP: MUX Plan

EXTRA

172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2
LC 1
#1
C
C
1
W1 (H)
STM 4
W2 (L)
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8
STM 4
Slot Slot Slot Slot

LC13
25#5
#1 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C
C
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2
Slot
C
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 17 #5
2 Mbps
Electrical
DDF
STM 4
EXT Shelf
TEAM 1
TEAM 2
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM-1
Electrical
STM 16
Set to Inward
loopback
Set to Inward
loopback

Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 24 #2 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot24
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
#1

C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
1
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16

17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
W2 (L)
TEAM 4
STM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4
W1 (H)
EXTRA
EXT Shelf
STM 4
DDF
Fig. 67 1:N MSP: Mux Plan
Query
1) Configure and enable the MSP. Setup the cross-connection as stated above.
2) Once your partner teams have finished with the configuration, check if the MSP
protection is using the configured working lines. This is indicated by a "Normal"
switch status.
3) Make sure that there is no switch request pending on the MSP. With the help of
the instructor check that the normal traffic as well as the extra traffic is up and
running on the measurement instruments.
Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK
Worker 1 (High Priority)

Worker 2 (Low Priority)
Extra Traffic
FT52426EN02GLA1
95
Protection Features
4) Ask your instructor to shutdown the laser on the worker line W2(L) between NE
"Leipzig" and the NE "Potsdam". Verify the traffic flows.
Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK

Extra Traffic
5) Now request to your instructor to shutdown the laser on the worker line W1(H)
between NE "Leipzig" and NE "Potsdam". Verify the traffic flows.
Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK

Extra Traffic
6) Ask your instructor to enable the laser again on the worker line W2(L) between
NE "Leipzig" and NE "Potsdam". Verify the traffic flows.
Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK

Extra Traffic
96
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
7) Finally, ask your instructor to enable the laser again on the worker line W1(H)
between NE "Leipzig" and NE "Potsdam" and check the traffic flows.
Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK

Extra Traffic
8) At the end, please delete the MSP and all cross connections created.
FINISH.
Ive got it !
FT52426EN02GLA1
97
Protection Features
Exercise 3
Title:
Path Protection
Objectives:
Setup and Test a Path protection
Pre-requisite:
Active NEs connected together via alternate routes
Task
student _ _

NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Team 1 and 4 has to configure a SNCP protection according to the details given in
Fig. 70.
Team 2 and 3 has to configure a SNCP protection according to the details given in
Fig. 71.
98
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
SNCP for Team 1 and 4 : MUX Plan

STM 4
172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2
LC 1
#1
C
C
1
STM 4
STM 4
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8
Slot Slot Slot Slot

LC13
25#5
#1 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7
Slot
Slot Slot Slot Slot
#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 25 #1 16 C
C
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2
Slot
C
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 17 #5
EXT Shelf
2 Mbps
Electrical
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1
STM 16
LC 1
#1
C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 16 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080
1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16

17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
STM 4
STM 4
DDF
Fig. 70 SNCP Mux Plan: Team 1 and 4
Common SNCP configuration parameters:
Type: Bidirectional
Circuit Label: SNCP
Capacity: VC-12
Restore Mode: Revertive
Intrusive Mode: SNCP/N
Hold Off Time: 0
FT52426EN02GLA1
99
Protection Features
According with your assigned team, please procedure to make the following cross
connections:
Team
Equipment Name
Leipzig
SNCP
1
Potsdam
Landau
SNCP
SNCP
4
Wuppertal
100
SNCP
Source TP
Working TP
Protection TP
(TPA)
(TPZ)
(TPZ')
Slot 2. Port # 2
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
LC1. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 2
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 25. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
SNCP for Team 2 and 3: MUX Plan

STM 4
172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2
LC 1
#1
C
C
1
STM 4
STM 4
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8
Slot Slot Slot Slot

LC13
25#5
#1 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 25 #1 16 C
C
7080
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080 Potsdam
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2
Slot
C
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 17 #5
EXT Shelf
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 2
STM 16
2 Mbps
Electrical
LC 1
#1
C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 16 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W)
Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
1
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16

17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100
TEAM 3
STM 4
STM 4
DDF
Fig. 71 SNCP Mux Plan: Team 2 and 3
Common SNCP configuration parameters:
Type: Bidirectional
Circuit Label: SNCP
Capacity: VC-12
Restore Mode: Revertive
Intrusive Mode: SNCP/N
Hold Off Time: 0
According with your assigned team, please procedure to make the following cross
connections:
FT52426EN02GLA1
101
Protection Features
Team
Equipment Name
Leipzig
SNCP
2
Potsdam
Landau
SNCP
SNCP
3
Wuppertal
SNCP
Source TP
Working TP
Protection TP
(TPA)
(TPZ)
(TPZ')
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 25. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
LC1. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Query
1) Ask the instructor to setup the measurement instrument, and verify there are no
errors detected for the test path
2) Check if the SNCP is using the worker path. If not, switchover the traffic to the
worker path, verify the traffic flow with the help of the measurement instruments.
Make sure the protection is in the normal status.
3) Ask your instructor to interrupt the traffic over the working path and verify on the
NE that the traffic switched to the protection path. Verify the traffic flow with the
help of the measurement instruments.
4) Repair the worker path and verify that the traffic switches back after the WTR
timer has expired.
5) Delete the protection path. Verify the traffic flow with the help of the measurement
instruments.
6) Once all the previous steps have been completed, delete the protection and
remaining cross connections.
102
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
FINISH.
Ive got it !
FT52426EN02GLA1
103
Protection Features
Exercise 4
Title:
Card Protection
Objectives:
Setup and Test a card protection
Pre-requisite:
Active NEs connected together via alternate routes
Task
student _ _

NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
From this exercise will perform both STM-1 and E1 card protection. In a way to
create these protections, please follow the MUX diagram in Fig. 74.
104
FT52426EN02GLA1
Protection Features
E1 + STM-1 Card Protection : MUX Plan

Set to Inward
loopback
STM 4
2 Mbps
Electrical
STM 4
STM 4
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8
Slot Slot Slot Slot

LC13
25#5
#2 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7
Slot
Slot
Slot Slot Slot
#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 24 #1 16 C
C
7080
Slot
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17
#8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C
Slot 3
C
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2
Slot
C
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 24 #1
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1
STM 16
TEAM 4
TEAM 3
Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 24 #1 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W)
Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8
2 Mbps
Electrical

C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080
1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 24 #1 17 #8
STM 16
Slot Slot
Slot Slot Slot
17 #8 25 #2 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4
Set to Inward
loopback
STM 4
STM 4
Fig. 74 E1 + STM-1 card protection MUX Plan
Proceed with the following settings:
Team
NE
EPG Type
Working
Card
Protecting
card
WTR
Leipzig
1:N E1
Slot 25
Slot 26
30 (sec)
Potsdam
1:N STM-1 E
Slot 24
Slot 28
30 (sec)
Wuppertal
1:N E1
Slot 25
Slot 26
30 (sec)
Landau
1:N STM-1 E
Slot 24
Slot 28
30 (sec)
FT52426EN02GLA1
105
Protection Features
Create the following Cross connection

Team
NE
Type
Level
Name
TPA
TPZ
Slot 3. Port # 1
Leipzig
Bidirectional
VC-12
CP
Slot 25. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 1
2
Potsdam
Bidirectional
VC-12
CP
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Landau
Bidirectional
VC-12
CP
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 24. Port # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 24. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Wuppertal Bidirectional
VC-12
CP
Slot 25. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Query
1) Ask the instructor to setup the measurement instrument, and verify there are no
errors detected for the test path.
2) Check where the traffic is going in which E1 card and in which STM-1 E card.
3) Require to your instructor to plugged out the card in Slot 25 in Leipzig and
Wuppertal, or execute an internal switch request through the software. Check the
protection state status on both protections and the test analyzer if the traffic is still
running.
4) Repeat the same procedures now for the Slot 24 in Potsdam and Landau.
Once all the previous steps have been reached and fulfilled, delete the protection and
remaining cross connections.
106
FT52426EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Maintenance
Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3
3.1
Alarm handling
Basic information
General definitions
Alarm displays
Changes on the Default Alarm Configuration
SDH alarm scheme
Optical safety management
Reboot and shutdown
Test management
Basic fault clearance
Site Maintenance
General card replacement procedures
FT52427EN02GLA1
3
4
6
8
20
41
42
46
48
50
58
61
62
Maintenance
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Alarm handling
Fig. 1
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
1.1
Basic information
Fault Management is concerned with the detection, localization, isolation and

reporting of failures on the transmission signals processed by the hiT 7080 and on
the hiT 7080 equipment itself.
The signal and equipment failures are differentiated in two failure classes:
transmission failures
equipment failures
In addition to these two failure categories the hiT 7080 supports external alarm
contacts (MDI, MDO), which can be used for signaling any kind external events.
Failures are reported via the management interface to the OS and may also lead to
alarm indications at the TNMS-C (card indications, NE indications).
A list of current alarms is kept for every NE and is updated according to changes
reported by the respective NE.
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
hiT 7080 Alarms

TNMS
History Alarms
Active Alarms
Raised alarms
Fig. 2 SURPASS hiT7080 alarms
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Maintenance
1.2
General definitions
Alarm Severity
Depending on the significance of the alarm messages and the alarm severity
assigned to them, they trigger different reactions. A minor fault which, for example,
has the effect of degrading the transmission signal (increased bit error rate) usually
has no significant effect on operation; for this reason, it results in a low priority alarm
message (minor). In contrast, serious faults can cause an interruption of service
and therefore result in a high priority alarm message (major), which requires
immediate fault clearance.
There are four classes of alarm priorities:
Critical (red high-light): Critical alarm

Major (orange high-light): Major alarm
Minor (yellow high-light): Alarm of no great significance
Warning (blue high-light): Alarm acting as a warning
Alarm Types
Traffic related:
Communication alarms: The communication alarms originate at TPs (termination
Points).
Quality of Service Alarms: The QoS alarms originate from TPs with performance
measurements and thresholds cross notifications.
Equipment related:
Equipment alarms: The equipment alarms originate from specific cards.
Environmental alarms: Environmental alarms are external alarms.
Processing error alarms: The processing error alarms originate from Software.
Clear Status
Cleared: This status indicates the alarm is no longer active. The alarm will remain
in the LCT Active Alarm list until it is acknowledged. Once the alarm is
acknowledged is will show up on the LCT History Alarms list
Not Cleared: Indicates the alarm is still active on the Network element. Not
Cleared Alarms are shown on the LCT Active Alarms list
Cleared Manually: Indicates the current operator has cleared this alarm on this
LCT. Note this alarm will return to Not Cleared status when the operator logs out
and in again or performs alarm synchronization.
After having received an alarm-raised notification the LCT assumes that this alarm is
present until a corresponding alarm cleared notification is received
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Alarm Types:
Communications:
Associated with procedures and/or processes required to convey

information from one point to another
Quality of service:
Associated degradation in the quality of a service
Processing error:
Associated software or processing fault
Equipment:
Associated equipment fault
Environmental:
Associated condition relating to an enclosure in which the equipment

resides
Alarm event types :

Not Cleared:
Indicates the beginning of a certain alarm
Cleared:
Indicates the clearing of a previously reported alarm
Cleared Manually: Indicated Alarm is acknowledged.
Fig. 3 Alarm types and events
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Maintenance
1.3
Alarm displays
1.3.1
Input Power Monitoring
Input Power monitoring is performed by the SC card. Status LEDs at the power I/O
section indicate that the corresponding power supply is on. See Fig. 4.
1.3.2
Alarm LEDs on SI and SI-E card
On hiT 7080 the NE summary alarm indications are shown on the front panel of the
System Interface. Three LED's indicate the network element alarm conditions.
Label Color
Status
Description
CR
ON
One or more critical non communication alarms are

present.
Red
Flashing One or more critical communication alarms are present.

LED test (Note1).
SI card is initialization. (Note2)
OFF
MJ
Orange ON
No critical alarms are present, and system is in service.

There are one or more major alarms present.
Flashing LED test (Note1)

MN
Yellow
OFF
No major alarms.
ON
There are one or more minor alarms present.
Flashing LED test (Note1)

OFF
No Minor alarms. (Warning and Indeterminate alarms

wont turn the LED on)
Note1: After the LED test button is pushed, all LED's except all cards PWR LED and
FE interfaces small link LED as well as SC card CF LED will be flashing for 5 sec.
Note2: During the NE cold or warm reboot period, there are two steps.
First step: SI E card initialization; all three LED's are OFF

Second step: After that, all three LED's are flashing with 1 second frequency. Stop
flashing of those three LED's is regarded as the finish point of the rebooting.
Before whole system (all cards) isn't up, the alarm status reported by each card
will not be reflected by the Critical/Major/Minor LED's.
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Input Power Monitoring
WORKING
PROTECTING
RETURN/RED
-48V/BLUE
RETURN/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK
RETURN/RED
-48V/BLUE
Power(A)
Power(A)
RETURN/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK
Power(B)
Power Monitoring LEDs
Fig. 4 Input Power Monitoring
Label
Color
Status
Description
ON
Critical (CR)
Major (MJ)
RED
ORANGE
Minor (MI)
YELLOW
One or more critical non communication alarms are present

One or more critical communication alarms are present.
LED test (Note 1).
SI card is inizialitation process (Note2).
FLASHING
OFF
No Critical alarms are present and the system is in service
ON
There are one or more major alarms present

LED test (Note 1).
FLASHING
OFF
No major alarms
ON
There are one or minor alarms present
FLASHING
LED test (Note 1).

OF
PWR CR LED ACO
TEST
DEGUG
MJ
MN
FAULT
No minor alarms (Warning and Indeterminate alarms wont turn the LED on )
T3-1
SUP
T4-1
T3-2
MGT-1
ALM
T4-2
EXT-1
MGT-2
HCOC2
HCOC1
EXT-3
EXT-2
EXT-4
EOW
MDO1-4
MDI1-4
MDO5-8
MDI5-8
F1-1
F1-2
Fig. 5 Alarm LED's on SI-E Card
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
1.3.3
Common LED indications on modules
To assist in maintenance, there are some LEDs on the front of some of the modules.
Not all cards have all of the following LEDs. Refer to the table below indicating which
cards have which LEDs.
PWD LED: A Green "PWD" LED indicates the card is powered. "PWD" LED off
indicates that there is not Power available due to a broken power converter, external
power cable or connector.
FAULT LED: A red FAULT LED indicates one or more alarms are present or the
card is booting.
TIP
The "FAULT" LED will also be lit on a traffic card if a SFP is not inserted or there is
no signal received.
ACT LED: A green "ACT" LED shows the EPG state. When NE is rebooting, the
state of this LED will be kept. For HOCC cards, this LED will be on when there is only
one HOCC card because the EPG of HOCC always exists.
LINK LED: The green "Link" LED state on SDH interface is related to LOS. The Link
LED state on GE interface is related to link status. Warm reboot will not affect the
state of Link LED.
10
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
LEDs
Card
ACT
SC
PWR
FAULT
CF
LINK
CR
MJ
MN
SI
X
X
SI E
HOCC
LOCC
2 x STM-64
8 x STM-16
8 x STM-4/1
8 x STM-1e (W/P)
8 x STM-1e (I/O)
12 x E3/DS3 (W/P)
12 x E3/DS3 (I/O)
126 x E1 (W/P)
126 x E1 (I/O)
1 x 10GE/T
8 x GE/T
6 x GE + 4 x FEGE/A
POA
BOA
Fig. 6 Common LED's indications on modules
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
Maintenance
1.3.4
Alarm display on LCT
Active Alarm List

A detailed listing of all alarms, recorded since the operating terminal began
monitoring alarms, can be found by selecting from "Chassis View" main menu:
Fault Active Alarms.
The list contains all alarms which are not acknowledged independently of its Cleared
Status. The possible cleared statuses are:
Cleared: alarm cleared event received for that alarm from NE. This event is time
stamped on the alarm details.
Not Cleared: no alarm cleared event received yet for that alarm from NE
Cleared Manually: alarm cleared manually by the operator. After synchronizing
the NE, or login out and in again, the alarm will show up once more in a new entry
as Not Cleared. The line with "Cleared Manually" status will remain in the list.
There, three time stamps are given per alarm:
alarm raise time

alarm clear time
time the alarm was acknowledged (the user that performed the command is also
recorded)
Alarm Detail Window

To have access to the detail of one alarm, please proceed with these steps:
1. Select an alarm from the alarm list. The background color will turn to grey
2. Click on the "Detail" button, a Description, Cause and Recommended Action for
that alarm is displayed.
12
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Access to print the list

in several file formats
Help
topics
Alarm
filter
Get more details

about one alarm
Fig. 7 Active Alarm list
Fig. 8 Alarm Detail window
FT52427EN02GLA1
13
Maintenance
To acknowledge an alarm:
1. Select the alarm entry in the "Active Alarm" list.
2. With a click on the right mouse button open pop-up menu and select
"Acknowledge Alarm" from command list. The "Acknowledge Comments"
window will open.
3. Write optionally some comment about the alarm into the comment field.
TIP
When an alarm with status "Cleared" or "Cleared Manually" is acknowledged, it
automatically disappears from the LCT "Active Alarms" list and shows up in the
LCT "History Alarms" list. Alarms with status "Not Cleared" will remain in the
"Active Alarms" list even if they are acknowledged.
LCT History Alarms list

In the History Alarm list one can find alarms which are
cleared or
have been cleared manually and
are acknowledged
Only alarm entries in the LCT History Alarms list can be deleted.
To delete an alarm:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Fault History Alarms. The "History
Alarm" window will open.
2. Select the alarm you want to delete from list.
3. With a click on the right mouse button open pop-up menu and select "Delete
Alarm" from command list. A "Confirmation" window will pop up.
4. Click the "Yes" button to confirm. The alarm will be removed from the alarm list.
14
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
2
1
3
4
Fig. 9 Alarm Acknowledgement
3
2
Fig. 10 History Alarms List
FT52427EN02GLA1
15
Maintenance
Filtered Alarm Display

If you want to display Active Alarms or History Alarms for a specific card or port:
1. Select the object (card or port) in the "Chassis View" window.
2. With a click on the right mouse button open pop-up menu and select "Active
Alarms" or "History Alarms" from command list. The corresponding alarm
window will pop up and will display the active/history alarms for the selected
object.
3. To remove the filter condition from the alarm list, press "Search". The "Alarm
Search" window will pop up.
4. Search parameters are set to defaults. Press "OK" in the "Alarm Search"
window. The filter condition will be removed and all active / history alarms on the
NE will be displayed.
Alarms filtered by severity and/or category
Alarms sorted on an alarm severity and/or category criteria can be obtained by
clicking over the number indicating the quantity of alarms at the lower section of the
GUI as shown in Fig. 12
16
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
1
4
2
Fig. 11 Filtered Alarm Display
Double
click
Fig. 12 Alarms filtered by severity and/or category
FT52427EN02GLA1
17
Maintenance
1.3.5
Event Information in LCT
Besides the Alarms lists, it could be important for the maintenance tasks to know
about the exact moment there were changes in the system status. The events logged
are:
System Level Events (access, reboot, MIB, etc)

Card Level Events (state, error report, etc)
Port Level Event (port state, SFP state, port operation mode)
Equipment Protection Events
Traffic Protection Events
Synchronization Events
DCN Events
Ethernet Events
The TNMS M LCT time stamps every event and logs it in a file. The Events listed in
the log file detail the time and date the event occurred, the event's name, type, and a
short description. The event about the communication between NE and LCT is
recorded in LCT rather than getting it from NE.
To open the Events list:
1. In the chassis Main Menu select Fault Events
The Events list windows opens
TIP
This is only an information window; there are not configuration options available
18
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Fig. 13 Events List
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
Maintenance
1.4
1.4.1
Changes on the Default Alarm Configuration

Alarm Rule Switch Configuration
To control the RS LOF, TU LOM and TU LOP reporting:

1. From "Chassis View" main menu select:
Fault Alarm Rule Switch Configuration
2. Set the LOF Monitoring Switch parameter from drop-down list to:
"Enable" to set to non monitoring.
"Disable" to set to monitoring.
3. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to activate the changes.
20
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
RS LOF reporting controlled by Alarm Switch Configuration
When disable,
RS-LOF alarms
are reported!
Fig. 14 RS-LOF reporting controlled by Alarm Rule Switch Configuration
1
2
1
3
Fig. 15 Alarm Rule Switch Configuration
FT52427EN02GLA1
21
Maintenance
1.4.2
AIS and RDI alarms configuration
It is possible to enable or disable the AIS/RDI alarms for the complete network
element or for particular termination points. The default configuration is AIS and RDI
alarms disabled for the complete network element. This is done so in order to
minimize the amount of alarm entries in the Alarms lists in case of a failure, taking in
consideration that AIS/RDI alarms are "secondary" alarms. In the majority of the
cases it might be enough to see only the primary alarms to carry out the
troubleshooting. Changes made in this window have an immediate effect over the
alarm list
To see current settings in the AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration window:
1. In the main menu click over Fault AIS/RDI Alarms Configuration
2. Once the AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration window opens, press the
"Query" button to see the termination points and the current configuration
3. An "Information" box will show up asking to wait for a moment
4. After the termination points (TPs) are shown, select the TPs where the AIS/RDI
alarms should be enabled. This can be done for the complete network element,
for a complete card or for individual TPs (MS, AU-4). By default all the points are
disabled (checkpoints not selected). The activation can be done for a particular
TP, for a complete card or for the complete NE.
5. Click on "Apply or Ok" button to make the changes real.
6. At the first AIS alarm enabling, a confirmation dialog box will be presented
informing that the AIS alarm will be enabled for the element.
7. Click on "Yes" button.
8. Another "Information" box will show up asking to wait for a moment until the
changed data are uploaded.
9. The updated AIS/RDI Enabled Configuration window will be presented.
WARNING
Even when the secondary alarms (AIS/RDI) are disabled, they will not show up
as "Disable" in the Alarm Type List.
22
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
2
Fig. 16 AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration I
4
9
7
8
Fig. 17 AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration II
FT52427EN02GLA1
23
Maintenance
1.4.3
Alarm inhibit configuration
For those cards or ports which are currently not used, it is possible to mask their
alarms completely. This is done through the Alarm Inhibit Configuration window. The
changes made in this window have an immediate effect, that is, if a card/port with
active alarms is inhibited all the alarms go immediately to the Cleared status (green
background color in the Active Alarms list). If the card/port was in the inhibit state and
it is configured to Non-Inhibit, then if there were active alarms affecting that card/port,
they would go to the Not Cleared status.
WARNING
The default configuration after the commissioning procedure is the complete
network element alarms inhibited. The Active Alarm list will not show any
alarm.
In order to change the alarm inhibit configuration:
1. In the "Chassis View" main menu, select Fault Alarm Inhibit Configuration
2. The "Alarms Inhibit Configuration" window opens. There you can see the
settings for the complete NE, particular cards or ports. If the corresponding check
point is set, then the relevant alarms for that particular object are inhibited. The
plus sign shows the child objects for the parent object besides (e.g. the ports for
a particular card are the child objects and the card the parent).
WARNING
If the alarms are inhibited for a particular child object (e.g. port) the parent
object check point (e.g. card) will not show this condition. You have to click the
plus sign to find out if the alarms are inhibited there.
3. Set the check point for the card/port where the alarms should be inhibited/non
inhibited
4. Click the "OK" or "Apply" button to make the changes real
5. In the information dialog box that shows up, click the OK button to finish.
24
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
1
2
5
4
Fig. 18 Alarm Inhibit Configuration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
Maintenance
1.4.4
Alarm type list management
The Alarm Severity for every alarm within each network element can be modified
based on the alarm type.
Also the reporting of alarms can be enabled and disabled based on the alarm type.
WARNING
Disabling any alarm will only apply to new alarms and not to current alarms. If
an active alarm is disabled, it will remain in the Active Alarm list, but if a new
failure leads to an alarm of the same type, this one will not be reported. The
same happens with Alarm Severity.
To open the "Alarm Type List Management" window in order to modify the severity
and the alarm reporting status:
1. In the "Chassis View" main menu select Fault Alarm Type List
Management
2. Selected a particular alarm (the background color becomes blue).
3. With a click on the right mouse button on the "User Defined Severity" column
open pop-up menu and select the alarm severity.
4. With a click on the right mouse button on the "Report Status" column enable or
disable alarm reporting for the selected alarm type.
5. To make the changes real and close this window, click the "OK or Apply"
button. An "Information" window will pop up.
6. Click the "Yes" button to confirm.
26
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
4
5
1
Fig. 19 Alarm Type List Management
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27
Maintenance
1.4.5
Alarm Persistency Time Configuration
In particular failure scenarios, the alarm persistency is very short. Commonly these
alarms are known as intermittent alarms.
The intermittent alarms will fill the alarms logs (Active Alarms, History Alarms) in a
very short period of time.
To avoid the logs filling with intermittent alarms, the persistency time can be
configured in hiT 7080. The Alarm Detection Persistent Time represents the
minimum time the alarm has to be present before it is reported in the Alarms List (by
default the value is 2 seconds). The Alarm Clearing Persistent Time represents the
minimum time the alarm has to remain in the cleared status before being cleared in
the Alarms List (default value, 10 seconds).
In order to change the persistency times,
1. In the "Chassis View" main menu select Fault Alarm Persistent Time
Configuration
2. Change the "Alarm Detection Persistent Time" and "Alarm Clearing
Persistent Time" accordingly
3. Click the "Apply" button to finish. An "Information" window will pop up.
28
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
2
3
3
4
Fig. 20 Changing Alarm Persistent Time
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Maintenance
1.4.6
Event Log Configuration
The operator can define the Event Log Policy. The Event Log policy is executed
when the number of the stored events in the event log file reaches the maximum.
To define the Event Log Policy:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Fault Event Log Configuration
2. Select the size of stack for logs. The minimal size could be selected is 500 and
the maximal size could be selected is 5000.
Enter the event log storage policy from the drop-down list:
FIFO: if there are new incoming events, the newest events will be stored while the
oldest ones will be discarded.
rejectNewEvent: any new incoming event will be rejected.
30
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
2
1
3
4
Fig. 21 Event Log Configuration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
Maintenance
1.4.7
Alarm Out Configuration
On the front plate of the hiT 7080 SI-E card there are three LEDs intended to indicate
summarized alarm conditions. The red LED indicates critical alarms, the orange LED
indicates mayor alarms and the yellow one minor alarms. The warning severity is not
shown.
For rack alarm indications, the systems use the ALM connector on the SI-E card.
Through this connector the SI-E can drive subrack alarm information to an external
alarm card that summarizes the rack alarms. The external alarm card has an "urgent"
and a "non urgent" alarm indication.
The alarm LEDs on the SI-E and in the external alarm card can be affected pressing
the push buttons on the NEs (Suppress and Alarm Cut Off) or using LCT menu.
"Alarm out suppress" performs a temporarily alarm cutoff of this alarms. It has the
same effects as pressing the suppress button on the NE. If new alarms go to the
raised status, the LEDs are going to be lit again.
The other 3 field are related with the external alarm panel.
"Alarm Out Cuttoff" performs a permanently alarm cutoff for the alarms going to the
external alarm panel.
"Enable CR / MJ Alarm Out" and "Enable Minor Alarm Out" are also used in order
to enable or disable alarms on the external alarm panel.
In order to access the "Alarm Out Configuration" window:
1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration Alarm Out
Configuration
2. Select the desired action; e.g. "Alarm Out Suppress".
32
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
1
3
Fig. 22 Alarm Out Configuration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33
Maintenance
1.4.8
MDI / MDO Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7080 provides two RJ 45 ports for eight MDI (Miscellaneous Discrete
Input) interfaces and two RJ 45 ports for eight MDO (Miscellaneous Discrete Output)
interfaces. These connectors are placed on the front plate of the SI E card.
MDI is used to read the status of external alarms.

MDO is used to drive external devices.
The specification for the electrical contacts can be found in the Technical Description
of the hiT 7080.
In order to access the "MDI / MDO Alarm Configuration" window:
1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration MDI/MDO Alarm
Configuration
2. Select the "MDI" tab to configure the inputs
3. For each MDI you can configure the following parameters:
Label: Enter free text to help identify different MDIs.
Status: Select from the drop-down list to enable or disable the MDI status.
4. Click the "Apply" button to make your changes permanent. An "Information"
window will pop up.
6. Select the "MDO" tab to configure the outputs
7. Select the MDO from the drop-down list and the corresponding alarms of this
MDO port will be displayed in the "Already Associated Alarm List" pane.
8. Select from the drop-down list to "Enable" or "Disable" the MDO status.
9. Click on the "arrow" buttons to move the selected alarms from the
"Unassociated Alarm List" pane to the "Already Associated Alarm List"
pane and vice versa.
10. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to make your changes permanent. An
"Information" window will pop up.
34
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Fig. 23 Open MDI/MDO Configuration window
6
3
2
2
9
4
2
10
2
11
Fig. 24 MDI/MDO configuration
FT52427EN02GLA1
35
Maintenance
1.4.9
Port Monitoring Configuration
It is possible to change the port monitoring configuration for each SDH port in the hiT
7080 equipment.
Auto Mode: The default configuration for the ports is Auto Mode, it means, the
system will not monitor the port as long as there is no valid signal detected on RX.
Monitor Mode: From that point on, when a valid input signal is detected for the
first time, the port mode changes to Monitoring. This enables alarm reporting.
Non monitor Mode: Is it also possible to configure the port mode to Non
monitor. In that case the alarms will never be reported for that port.
TIP
The configuration changes are immediately applied in the "Active Alarms" list.
Changing the port mode for a particular port to Monitor/Non-monitor modifies
immediately the cleared status for the alarms affecting that port (considering the
persistency time).
In order to access the "SDH Port Property Configuration" window:
1. Right mouse click over the relevant SDH port.
2. In the pop-up menu select "SDH Port Configuration".
3. In the "Port Property Configuration" window the "Port Mode" can be changed.
4. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to make your change permanent.
36
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
5
4
Fig. 25 SDH port monitoring mode configuration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37
Maintenance
1.4.10
Termination point monitoring configuration
It is possible to change the termination point (TP) monitoring configuration for:
RS TTP on SDH ports, RSOH.

MS TTP on SDH ports, MSOH.
VC4 CTP (NIM: Non Intrusive Monitoring) when VC4 is not structured, read only
access to the POH.
WARNING
The default configuration for TP Alarm Mon on all the termination points (TP) is
"Non-Monitored", it means, the Active Alarm list will not show alarms related
with those TP.
In order to see alarms related to a particular TP, it is necessary configure the
parameter "TP Alarm Mon" to "Monitored". To access the point
1. From the "Chassis View" Main Menu, select Configuration TP
Configuration
2. In the "TP Configuration" window select the relevant card and port
3. Click the Query button to get the list of TPs for that card and port
4. Select the Termination Point where the change should be made (the background
color changes to blue)
5. Modify TP Alarm Mon, the options are Monitored / Non-monitored
6. Click the Apply button to make your changes permanent. An "Information"
window will pop up.
38
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
2
1
Fig. 26 Open TP Configuration window
5
RS TTP
VC4 TTP
M S TTP
VC12
TTP
Fig. 27 TP Configuration
FT52427EN02GLA1
39
Maintenance
40
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
TxDeg
auLOP
SD
SSF
AIS
TxFail
TS_T3
FERF
MIS-SL
LOS
UNEQ
Fig. 28
FT52427EN02GLA1
41
Maintenance
2.1
SDH alarm scheme
Large numbers of alarm and error messages are an integral part of SDH networks. In
SDH, these are referred to as defects and anomalies, respectively. They are coupled
to network sections and the corresponding overhead information. The advantage of
this detailed information is illustrated as follows:
Complete failure of a circuit results, e.g. in a LOS alarm (loss of signal) in the
receiving network element. This alarm triggers a complete chain of subsequent
messages in the form of AIS (alarm indication signals). The transmitting side is
informed of the failure by the return of an RDI alarm (remote defect indication). The
alarm messages are transmitted in fixed bytes in the SOH or POH. For example, byte
G1 is used for the HP-RDI alarm.
42
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
STM-N Alarm Scheme

High Order Path
Multiplex Section
Regenerator
Section
Regenerator
Section
K2
MS
RDI
HP
RDI
AIS
MS-AIS
LOS/LOF
AIS
MS
RDI
HP
RDI
K2
MS BIP
BIP Err.
G1
MS
REI
B1
B2
HP
BIP
M1
HP
REI
B3
G1
SDH
Multiplexer
SDH
Regenerator
SDH
Multiplexer
Fig. 29 Sections in a SDH network
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
43
Maintenance
With the help of the overhead data bytes, we can send forward and backward from
the reporting network element certain alarm conditions. This information helps to
localize the fault as quickly as possible.
Using a process of prioritization, and elimination, we can determine where the fault is,
what is possibly causing it and what needs to be done to fix it.
The following diagram attempts to show the Alarms raised, their subsequent actions,
destinations in the forward and backward directions.
The following description should help to read the diagram:
(J0), (C2), (H4) etc are bytes to be found in the RSOH, MSOH, POH High and low
order.
The line shows the direction the Alarm is sent, with a description of the alarm
event for example Loss of Signal, or Loss of frame.
The following show all the alarms that cause the forwarding onwards or backwards
of the next alarm indication as required.
The alarm names indicate the alarms that all cause the subsequent alarm
indication and the "1" indicates the contents of the STM frame contains all "1"s in
the AU-4.
LOS/LOF
Detected and Raised

(Object, where the alarm is generated.)
Generation and Sent
Fig. 30 Symbol description
44
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Fig. 31 SDH maintenance interactions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
45
Maintenance
2.2
Optical safety management
All versions of optical interfaces include ALS circuits (Automatic Laser Shutdown),
which are activated whenever the optical carrier fails, in accordance with ITU-T
Recommendation G.958 and IEC standard 825 Appendix 2.
In the presence of a LOS (Loss-of-signal) alarm the Laser is automatically switched
OFF leaving the optical connection in ALS status. The laser can recover
automatically or can be manually triggered (manual restart). In case of automatic
recovery the system generates a trigger pulse every 90s 10 sec.
If the condition that generated the failure (LOS) overcomes, a valid signal is provided
on the RX interface, the connection is immediately recovered.
The specific equipment configuration allows the possibility to enable/disable the
automatic laser shutdown (enabled by default), according to the EM settings.
In order to change the ALS configuration:
1. Right mouse click on the selected SDH port.
2. Select "SDH Port Configuration" from pop-up menu.
3. Perform the required settings
4. Press the "Apply or Ok" button to make the changes permanent.
WARNING
Port Admin Mode "Disabled" will shut the laser down for the complete port.
Tx
Rx
LSOFF
LSOFF
Rx
Tx
Optical carrier break
Loss-off-signal (LOS) alarm
Loss-off-signal (LOS) alarm
Automatic Laser Shut-down (ALS)
Automatic Laser Shut-down (ALS)
Fig. 32 Automatic Laser Shutdown Mechanism
46
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Port admin mode:

Enable Laser on
Disable Laser off
3
2
Laser restart:
Manual restart:short pulse
Manual test: long pulse
4
2
Fig. 33 Optical Safety management
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
47
Maintenance
2.3
Reboot and shutdown
2.3.1
Software initiated
By selecting from "Chassis View" main menu Configuration NE from the main
menu there are 3 choices to reboot or shutdown the network element. These are:
Warm Reboot. Warm reboot will perform a network element software reload. This
option is not traffic effecting. System warm reboot process takes up to 18 minutes.
It is suggested that no operations (such as card insertion or pull out, system power
on or power off) be performed during system reboot.
Cold Reboot. Cold will perform both a software reboot as well as a hardware
reboot. System cold rebooting (system initialization) takes up to 19 minutes to

complete. It is suggested that no other operations (such as card insertion or pullout, system power-on or power-off) be performed during the system initialization.
System cold reboot will cause traffic hit. The traffic hit time is about 2 3 minutes
when traffic cards are rebooted.
Shutdown NE. This will perform a software shutdown of the system controller
card. This option is designed if you wish to perform a controlled shutdown of the
network element prior to switching off the power. This is not traffic effecting but it
does stop all management communications (CLI, TNMS-CT LCT, TNMS C).
TIP
Messages will show up informing about the consequences for the selected command
and asking for confirmation.
2.3.2
Hardware Initiated
There is a push button on the front of the SC card. For security reasons a small
object such as a pencil is required to push the button. This will perform a warm
reboot of the network element. This reboot is not traffic effecting.
2.3.3
Card Cold / Warm Reboot
On all traffic cards there is an option to perform a cold/warm reboot.

Cold reboot will stop all hardware functions and will reload the software from the
system controller. Lasers will be shut down during Cold Reboot. Traffic running on
this card will be interrupted. The card reboot time is 2 3 minutes.
Warm reboot restarts the card SW. Lasers stay turned on. Traffic is not interrupted.
To access the Cold/Warm Reboot options for a card, right click over the card and
select "Cold Reboot Card" or "Warm Reboot Card" from the pop up menu.
TIP
Messages will show up for the selected command and asking for confirmation.
48
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Software reebot.Not
traffic effecting
Hardware &Software
reebot. Traffic effecting
System controller shut down,

causes the NE go to offline
and will no be managed
anymore by TNMS. After shut
down, the power supply
should be disconnected
Fig. 34 Reboot Options
Software reebot only. Not

traffic effecting
Hardware & Software

reebot. Traffic effecting
Fig. 35 Cold/Warm Reboot a Traffic Card
FT52427EN02GLA1
49
Maintenance
2.4
2.4.1
Test management
Loopback test management
The SURPASS hiT 7080 support path and port loopbacks.

Path loopbacks where already discussed in the cross-connection chapter.
Nevertheless we can note here that as path loopbacks are created on the crossconnection matrix, they always send the input signal to the matrix towards the out
direction. They can be created on VC4, VC3 and VC12 level.
Port loopbacks are created on the interface card itself. The hiT 7080 supports "Port
Loopback" for SDH cards. Two types of loopback can be performed:
Inward Loopback
Outward Loopback
Inward Loopback
The Tx signal from the HOCC card will be looped on the SDH port and is sent back
towards the HOCC card.
Outward Loopback
The incoming line Rx signal will be looped back to the Tx port and transmitted onto
the line again.
50
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Loopbacks for Test

Outward loopback
Cross Connection
Card
Phy. Port
STM-N
Inward loopback
Cross Connection
Card
Phy. Port
STM-N
Fig. 36 Loopbacks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51
Maintenance
Configuring Port Loopbacks

To start a loopback test:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance Loopback Test
Management.
2. In the "Loopback Test Management" window select the desired "Card" and
"Loopback Type" to filter the list of available ports.
3. Select the desired port where the loopback should be configured
4. Click the "Modify" button. The "Loopback Test Configuration" window will
open.
5. Select the types of loopback required, either "Inward Loopback" or "Outward
Loopback".
6. Click the "Begin" button. A "Confirmation" window will pop-up.
7. Click "Yes" to confirm.
8. The "Loopback State" information will change to reflect the modification. Press
the "Close" button to return to the "Loopback Test Management" window
when finished.
To stop a loopback test:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance Loopback Test
Management.
2. In the "Loopback Test Management" window select the desired "Card" and
"Loopback Type" to filter the list of available ports.
3. Select the desired port where the loopback should be stopped
4. Click the "Modify" button. The "Loopback Test Configuration" window will
open.
5. Click the "Stop" button.
6. The "Loopback State" information will change to reflect the modification. Press
the "Close" button to return to the "Loopback Test Management" window
when finished.
WARNING
STM-N Port Loopbacks, loop back the whole STM frame (Payload and
Overheads) so care should be taken to make sure communications are
maintained.
52
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
1
2
1
3
4
5
1
6
7
8
Fig. 37 Start a Loopback
2
1
3
4
Fig. 38 Stop a Loopback
FT52427EN02GLA1
53
Maintenance
2.4.2
AIS / RDI Insertion Test Management
Configuration of Forced AIS/RDI

1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance AIS/RDI Insertion
Test Management.
2. In the "AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management" window select the desired "Card"
and "Port".
3. Click the "Query" button to filter.
4. An information window pops-up while the necessary information is retrieved from
the NE.
5. Select the Termination Point where the AIS/RDI is going to be inserted.
6. Click the "Set" button. The "AIS / RDI Insertion Test Set" window will open.
7. Click the radio button to select the "Insertion Test Type" required for your test.
Available options are:
Normal: No insertion test will be implemented.

In Forced-AIS: AIS will be inserted towards cross connection direction.
Out Forced-AIS: AIS will be inserted towards Tx port.
In Forced AIS and Out Forced AIS: AIS will be inserted both towards crossconnection direction and Tx port.
Out Forced RDI: RDI will be inserted towards Tx port.

8. Click the "OK" button to start the test.
9. An "Information" dialog box will confirm the action. Press the "OK" button to
proceed.
TIP
To stop a forced AIS / RDI select the "Normal" option in the "AIS / RDI Insertion
Test Set" window.
54
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Fig. 39 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management
7
9
8
Fig. 40 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set
FT52427EN02GLA1
55
Maintenance
2.4.3
LED Test
LED test is used to check if the LEDs of an NE are working correctly.

1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance LED Test to
launch the LED test dialog.
2. Click the "Test LED" button to start the test. If the LEDs on this NE work
properly, they will flash for a few seconds and then turn to their normal state. An
"Information" window will pop-up, when the test has finished.
NOTE
LCT user will not receive any feedback if LED test was successful or not. Visual
inspection of the LEDs directly at the NE has to be done.
56
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Fig. 41 LED Test
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57
Maintenance
2.5
Basic fault clearance
Basic options for alarm containment and alarm evaluation

Cables and Connectors
Check the electrical connectors to ensure that they are fully engaged and that
none of the pins is distorted.
Check the optical fibers and optical connectors in accordance with the instructions
given in Trouble Shooting Manual.
Check the cable layout (copper and optical fiber) in accordance with the wiring
diagram.
58
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Basic Fault Clearance

Alarm
LEDs on the front panels of the

Cards ( also visible on LCT)
Detailed
identification of the
alarm on the LCT GUI
Referring to the
Recommended actions in:
Alarm detail window
Troubleshooting Manual
Fig. 42 Basic fault clearance
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT52427EN02GLA1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
59
Maintenance
60
FT52427EN02GLA1
Maintenance
Site Maintenance
UX
X -M
X
MU
XL-
UX
T- M
X
- MU
XXL
12
U-5
CP
12
U-5
CP
R
DO
DT
X
-MU
X
MU
PT -
UX
SI-M
Fig. 43
FT52427EN02GLA1
61
Maintenance
3.1
General card replacement procedures
Before replacing a module which is suspected of being defective, try to reactivate the
system by means of a hardware reset (e. g. pulling and re-inserting the module), but
do not do this if the red fault LED on the module is illuminated.
WARNING
When replacing modules, you must comply with the safety regulation and the
module replacement procedure, as described in Trouble Shooting Manual.
When replacing a module, it is essential to check and record the optical and the
electrical transmitting power, using an optical or electrical power meter respectively,
before the modules are returned to service.
The module setup procedure can only start once the module has been correctly
inserted into the slot, as far as the stop, and then locked. Modules can be removed
from or plugged into the slots while they are live.
Special Card replacement procedures apply for the SC card. They are described in
the Troubleshooting Manual. Strictly follow these procedures when you have to
change a SC card.
For the HOCC card also special replacement procedures exist. They are also
described in the Troubleshooting Manual.
To change a Fan or Filter Unit follow procedures as described in the Troubleshooting
Manual and in the Installation and Test Manual.
Running system without HOCC card is abnormal operation, which should be
prohibited.
62
FT52427EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Contents
1
Abbreviations
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
Abbreviations
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
A
AB8FE
Adapter Box 8 FE
Abbr.
Abbreviation
AC
Alternating Current
ACM
Acquisition Mode
ACO
Alarm Cut Off
ADMX
Add Drop Multiplexer
AFI
Authority and Format Indicator
AGW
Access GateWay
AI_TSF
Adapted Information TSF
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal (G.782) (G.783)
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown (G.783)
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
APS
1) Application Program System

2) Automatic Protection Switching
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASE
Amplified Spontaneous Emission
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ASN.1
Abstract Syntax Notation number 1
ASON
Automatic Switched Optical Network
ASTN
Automatic Switched Transport Network
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU
Administrative Unit (G.782) (G.783)
AU-4
Administrative unit, level 4
AUG
Administrative Unit Group
AUX
Auxiliary Channel
B3ZS
Binary 3 Zero Suppression (Code)
BASW
Basic Application Software
BBE
Background Block Error
BBER
Background Block Error Ratio

FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
BER
Bit Error Ratio
BIP
Bit Interleaved Parity
BP
Boot Prom
BPDU
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BPL
Back-plane
BPS
Boot Program System
BRAS
Broadband Remote Access Server
BSHR
Bi-directional Self Healing Ring
BSHR-2
2-Fiber Bi-directional Self Healing Ring
BSHR-4
4-Fiber Bi-directional Self-Healing Ring
BTB
Bus Termination Board
Bw7R
Style 7R
C
CAN
Control Area Network (internal bus system)
CANEX
External CAN bus interface
CC
Compact Core
CC
Cross-Connect, Cross-Connection
CC_CH
Main Controller Card for Compact Core
CC_TX
Matrix and Timing Card for Compact Core
CCITT
Comit Consultative International Tlgraphique et Tlphonique
CCM
Card Controller Module
CCU
Card Clock Unit
CDR
Clock and Data Recovery
CD-ROM
Compact Disc Read Only Memory
CE
Communaut Europenne
CEC
Control Extension Cable for hiT 7050 CC_ES
CES
Ethernet Based Interface for Communication with Extension Shelf
CF
Card Fail
cHEC
Core Header Error Correction
CIR
Committed Information Rate
CI_SSF
Characteristic Information SSF
CISC
Complex Instruction Set Computer
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
CIST
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CLNS
Connectionless Mode Network Service
CLU
Clock Unit
CM
Connection Matrix
CMI
Code Mark Inversion
CMIP
Common Management Information Protocol (G.784)
CMISE
Common Management Information Service Element (G.783) (G.784)
CML
Common Mode Logic
CMS
Ethernet Based Interface for Communication with Main Shelf
C-n
Container (G.708)
COPA
Connector Panel
CoS
Class of Service
CP
1) Connection Point
2) Card Protection
CPE
Customer Premises Equipment
CPI
Card Present Interface
CPS
Card Program System
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRS
Card Release Switching
CSMA/CD
Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection
CST
1) Common Spanning Tree

2) Central Standard Time
CT
Craft Terminal
CTP
Connection Termination Point
Ctrl
Control
CUG
Closed User Group
CWDM
Course Wavelength Division Multiplexing
D1-D12
Data Communication Channel, defined in the SOH of a STM - 1
DA
Destination Address
DART
Digital Audio Reconstruction Technology
dB
Decibel
DC
Direct Current
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
DC
Double Core (Double-Row Subrack)
DCC
Data Communication Channel (G.708/782/783/784)
DCCA
Data Communication Channel Access
DCCB
Data Communication Channel Bus
DCCM
DCC Bytes D4 to D12 (multiplex section)
DCCR
DCC Bytes D1 to D3 (regenerator section)
DCM
Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN
Data Communication Network
DDF
Digital Distribution Frame
DEE
Data End Equipment
DEG
Signal Degraded (i.e. 10-8)
DEMUX
Demultiplexer
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DiffServ
Differentiated Services
DIN
Deutsche Industrienorm
DIS
Disable
D-lab
Distant laboratory
DLL
Dynamic Link Library
DM
Direction Mismatch
DNS
Domain Naming Service
DOC
DOH-Bus card layer
DOE
Electrical DOH-Bus layer
DOH
DCC/Overhead
DPT
Dynamic Packet Transport (CISCO)
DS
Defect Second
DSLAM
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DSP
Domain Specific Part
D-SUB
Connector Type
DTC
Design To Cost (Optimization)
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTM
Design To Manufacturing (Optimization)
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTS
Design To Service (Optimization)
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E1
Engineering Orderwire channel (EOW)
E100-4
Electrical 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (4 ports)
E100-8
Electrical 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports)
E100S-8
Electrical 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports),

Supporting LCAS (hiT 7050 FP1)
E100SP-8
Electrical 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card protected (8

ports), Supporting LCAS (hiT 7050 CC)
E155-4
Electrical 155-Mbit/s Interface Card (4 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
E155P-4
Electrical 155-Mbit/s Interface Card protected (4 ports) (hiT 7050 CC)
EB
Errored Block
EBC
Errored Block Counter
ECC
Embedded Communication Channel (G.784)
ECC (x)
Embedded Communications Channel, Layer x
EDC
Error Detection Code
EIA
Electronic Industry Association
ELAN
Extended LAN
EM
Element Manager (Software)
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EML
Element Management Layer
EmTRo
Embedded Transport Router
E&M
Exchange & Multiplex
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
EOW
Engineering Order Wire (G.783)
EoS
Ethernet over SDH/Sonet
EOWC
Engineering Order Wire Conference
ERX
Edge Router
ES
1) Electrical Section
2) End System
3) Errored Second
ES-IS
End system to Intermediate System Protocol
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
ESCON
Enterprise System CONnection
ESD
1) Electrostatic Sensitive Device

2) Electrostatic Discharge
ESM
Extension Shelf MicroShelf
ESM-CORE MicroShelf Core Card

ESRT
Equipment and Software Release Table
ETH
Ethernet
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standards Institute
ETS
European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standards Institute
EXC
Excessive bit error rate
EXER-R(E)
Exercise, Ring for East
EXER-R(W) Exercise, Ring for West

EXER-S(E)
Exercise, Span for East
EXER-S(W) Exercise, Span for West
F
F
Standardized Interface for the connection to a local control station
F1
User channel, defined in the SOH of a STM-1
F2
Path user channel, defined in the POH of VC-3/VC-4
FCAPS
Fault-, Configuration-, Accounting-, Performance- and Security

Management
FCC
Fan Unit for hiT 7050 CC
FCPC
Connector Type
FCS
Frame Check Sequence
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEDP
Fast Ethernet Distributor Panel
FE Link
Down
Far End Link Down (Ethernet Alarm)
FEC
1) Forward Error Correction

2) Forwarding Equivalence Class (MPLS)
FFP1
Fan Unit for hiT 7050 FP1
FICON
Fiber Connection
FM
Fault Management
FO
Fiber Optic
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
FOP
Failure of Protocol
FOT
Fail of topology
FOX
Forty Gigabit MUX
FP
Fabry-Perot
FP1
FlatPack 1
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
FR
1) Frame Relay
2) Fault Report
FR4
FRU
Field Replaceable Unit
FS
Forced Switch
FS-P
Forced Switch to Protection
FSP
Fiber Service Platform
FS-R(E)
Forced Switch to Protection, Ring for East
FS-R(W)
Forced Switch to Protection, Ring for West
FS-S(E)
Forced Switch to Protection, Span for East
FS-S(W)
Forced Switch to Protection, Span for West
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
FTZ
Deutsche Telekom, Forschungs- und Technologiezentrum
FW
Firmware
10
GARP
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
GBIC
GigaBit Ethernet Converter
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure
GFP-F
Generic Framing Procedure - Framed Mode
GFP-T
Generic Framing Procedure - Tansparent Mode
GMRP
GARP Multicast Registration Protocol
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GND
Ground
GNE
Gateway Network Element
GPRS
General Packet Radio Service
GPS
Global Positioning System
GRE
Generic Routing Encapsulation
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
GTP
Group Termination Point (of concatenated signals)
GUI
Graphical User Interface
GUIMN
Graphical User Interface Manual
GVRP
GARP VLAN registration protocol
H
HBT
High Bandwidth Tributary
HCOC
High Capacity Overhead Channel
HDB3
High Density Bipolar Code third order
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control
HEC
Header Error Control
HEL
History Event Log
HFC
Hybrid Fiber / Coax
HO
High Order (SDH Traffic)
HPC
Higher Order Path Connection (G.782) (G.783)
HPOM
Higher Order Path Monitoring
HRL
1) Connector Type
2) High Return Loss
HS
Handset
HTML
Hypertext Mark-up Language
HTTP
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HW
Hardware
I
ICOM
Internal Communication Infrastructure (in MSI Core)
ID
Identifier, Identification
IDI
Initial Domain Identifier
IDP
Initial Domain Part
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
I/O
Input/Output
IF
1) Interface
2) In Frame state
IF2M
Electrical E1 Interface Card, 63 x 2 Mbit/s
FT52428EN02GLA1
11
Abbreviations
IF345M
Electrical E3/DS3 Interface Card, 3 x 34/45 Mbit/s
IF4FE4GE
FE/GbE Board, 4 x FE el., 4 x GbE opt.
IF7FE2GEL2 L2 Switch Board, 7 x FE el., 2 x GbE opt.,

IFO155M
Interface 8 (Octal) x 155 Bit/s
IFO155M-E
Electrical STM-1 Card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s
IFOFE
Optical Octal 100BaseFX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports) VC4/VC-3
IFOFE-E
Electrical Octal 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports)

VC-4/VC-3
IFOFES-E
Electrical Octal 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports)

VC-3/VC-12
IFQ2G5(B)
Optical STM-16 Card, Quad 2.5 Gbit/s
IFQ622M
Optical STM-4 Card, Quad 622 Mbit/s
IFQGBE
Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card (4 ports)
IFQGBEB
Interface Quad. GBE Optical, VLAN Concentrator option
IFQGBE-E
Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card
IFQGBEB-E Interface Quad. GBE Electrical, VLAN Concentrator option

IFS10G(B)
Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s
IFS10G-M
Optical STM-64/OTU2 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s for Metro WDM
IFS10G-R
Optical STM-64/OTU2 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s for Regio WDM
IFS2G5
Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s
IFS2G5B
Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP
IFS40G-MX Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Card, 4 x 10 Gbit/s to 40 Gbit/s

IFSOA
Interface Single Optical Amplifier
IFSOA/PDC Interface Single Optical Amplifier with dispersion compensation

IFSOB
Optical Booster Card
IFSOB/PDC Optical Booster Card with dispersion compensation
12
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol
ILAN
Internal LAN
INT
Internal Alarm
IntServ
Integrated Services
IP
Interworking Protocol (G.784)
IP2OSI
IP to OSI
IS
Intermediate System (G.784)

FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
IS-IS
Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol
ISDH-4
Internal SDH signal (622 Mb)
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO
International Standards Organization (G.784)
ISP
Internet Service Provider
IST
Internal System Telegram
ITMN
Installation and Test Manual
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union Transmission
J
JE
Joint Engineering
JRE
Java Runtime Environment
K
K1, K2
Automatic protection switching channel defined in the SOH of a STM-1,
L
LACP
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (IEEE 802.3ad)
LAG
Link Aggregation Group
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPB
Link Access Procedure Balanced Mode
LAPD
Link Access Procedure on D channel
LAPS
Link Access Procedure over SDH (ITU-T X.86)
LASER
Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission Radiation
LBT
Low Bandwidth Tributary
LC
1) Lucent Connector
2) Link Connection
LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT
Local Craft Terminal (Software)
LCX
Local Cross-connect
LDP
Label Distribution Protocol
LE
Signaling of line failure
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LLC1
Logical Link Control Type 1
LMB
Left Mouse Button
FT52428EN02GLA1
13
Abbreviations
LMP
Link Management Protocol
LNC
Local Node Clock
LNQ622M
PDH Extension Link Card
LO
1) Lock-out Protection
2) Low Order (SDH Traffic)
LOF
Loss of Frame (G.783)
LofDel
Loss of Frame Delineation (GFP Alarm)
LOM
Loss of Multiframe
LOP
Loss of Pointer
LOS
Loss of Signal (G.783)
LOW(R-E)
Lockout of Working Channels - Ring Switch for East
LOW(R-EW) Lockout of Working Channels - Ring Switch for East and West
LOW(R-W)
Lockout of Working Channels - Ring Switch for West
LOW(S-E)
Lockout of Working Channels - Span Switch for East
LOW(S-EW) Lockout of Working Channels - Span Switch for East and West
14
LOW(S-W)
Lockout of Working Channels - Span Switch for West
LP
1) Logical Port (WAN Port)

2) Lockout of Protection
LP-S(E)
Lockout of Protection, Span for East
LP-S(W)
Lockout of Protection, Span for West
LPOM
Lower Order Path Monitoring
LSA
Connector Type
LSB
Line Switching board for IF345M 1+1 card protection
LSU
Line Switching Unit (Card) for 2 Mbit/s ports (hiT 7070)
LSU1
Line Switching Unit (Card) for 2 Mbit/s ports (hiT 7050 CC)
LSCP
Line Switch Card Protection
LSW64
Low-order Switch fabric (32x32 STM-1 equivalents for FP1)
LT
Line Termination
LTI
Loss of Timing Inputs
LTS
Loss Of Timing Signal
LTU
Line Termination Unit, Card which can be equipped in upper part of

Subrack
LVDS
Low Voltage Differential Signals
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
Lx
Line slot x
LXC
Local Cross Connect
M
MAC
Media Access Control (ISO/IEC 8802-3, ANSI/IEEE Std 802.3)
Major
Most priority alarm (urgent)
MAN
Metropolitan Area Network
MAU
Media Attachment Unit
MC
Matrix Connection
MCF
Message Communications Function (G.782/783/784)
MCU-B
Controller Unit B
MCUG
Multi CUG
MDI
Media Dependent Interface
MFNE
Multi-Function Network Element
MFP1
Main Board Drawer for FP1
MIB
Management Information Base
MINOR
Low priority alarm (non-urgent)
MIPS
Microprocessor without Interlocking Pipeline Stages
MMC
Multimedia Card (flash memory card)
MMF
Multimode Fiber
MP2MP
Multipoint to Multipoint
MPLS
Multi Protocol Label Switching
MS
Multiplex Section (G.783)
MSA
1) Multiplex Section Adaptation

2) Multi Source Agreement
MS-AP
MicroShelf Alarm Panel
MS-COPA
MicroShelf Alarm Panel
MS-ILANS
Micro-Shelf Internal LAN Switch
MSC
Main System Controller
MSN
Multi Service Node
MSOH
Multiplexed Section Overhead, rows 5-9 of Section Overhead of STM-1

(G.782) (G.783)
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection (G.782) (G.783)
MSPP
Multi-Service Provisioning Platform
FT52428EN02GLA1
15
Abbreviations
MS-R(E)
Manual Switch to Protection, Ring for East
MS-R(W)
Manual Switch to Protection, Ring for West
MS-S(E)
Manual Switch to Protection, Span for East
MS-S(W)
Manual Switch to Protection, Span for West
MS-SPRING Multiplex Section Shared Protection RING

MST
1) Multiple Spanning Tree

2) Multiplex Section Termination (G.782/783)
MSTP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MT-RJ
Model of optical connector in RJ-45 format
MTS
1) Multiplex Timing Source

2) Multi-wavelength Transport System (TransXpress Infinity)
MTTR
Mean Time to Repair
MUX
Multiplexer
16
N.a.
Not applicable
N.C.
Not Connected
NCT
Network Craft Terminal
NDF
New Data Flag
NE
Network Element (G.783) (G.784)
NEC
Network Element Controller
NEAP
Network Element Alarm Panel
NGN
Next Generation Network
NIC
Network Interface Card
NLPID
Network Layer Protocol Identifier
NNI
Network Node Interface
NP
Network Processor
NRoS
Network Rate of Service
NRZ
Non Return to Zero
NRZI
Non Return to Zero / Inverted
NSAP
Network Service Access Point
NT
Network Termination
NTP
Network Time Protocol
NUBAT1/2
Negative Power Supply Voltage
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
NURG
Not Urgent
NUT
Non-pre-emptible unprotected traffic
O
O1000-4
Optical 1000BaseSX/LX Gigabit Ethernet Interface Card (4 ports) or

configured as VLAN concentrator (1 port) (hiT 7050 FP1)
O1000P-4
Optical 1000BaseSX/LX Gigabit Ethernet Interface Card (4 ports) or

configured as VLAN concentrator (1 port) protected (hiT 7050 CC)
O155-2
Optical 155-Mbit/s Interface Card (2 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
O155-4
O155P-4
Optical 155-Mbit/s Interface Card (4 ports) protected (hiT 7050 CC)
O2500P-1
Optical STM-16 interface with contiguous concatenation (1 Port)

protected (hiT 7050 CC)
O622-2
O622C-2
O622CP-2
Optical 622-Mbit/s Interface Card (2 ports) protected (hiT 7050 CC)
OA&M
Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OC
Optical Channel
OCP
Optical Channel Protection
OCU
Optical Channel Unit
ODF
Optical Distribution Frame
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer
OFS
Out-of-Frame second
OGL
Operator Guidelines
OH
Overhead
OHA
1) Overhead Access (G.783)

2) Overhead Access Unit (card)
OHCC
Overhead Cross Connections
OHX
Overhead Access and Overhead Cross-Connection Function
OLE
Object Linking and Embedding
OPERA
Optical Edge Routing Architecture
OS
Operating System
OSC
Oscillator
OSI (x)
Open Systems Interconnection, Layer x
OSN
Optical Service Node
FT52428EN02GLA1
17
Abbreviations
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First (IP Protocol)
OTH
Optical transmission Hierarchy (ITU-T G.709)
OTN
Optical Transport Network (ITU-T G.709)
OTU-2
Optical Channel Transport Unit level 2
18
P1-21
Plesiochronous 2-Mbit/s Interface Card (21 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
P1-42
Plesiochronous 2-Mbit/s Interface Card (42 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
P1P-42
Plesiochronous 2-Mbit/s Interface Card (42 ports) protected (hiT 7050

CC)
P12MD
ASIC for 2Mbit/s Signals (Mapper/Demapper)
P3-3
Plesiochronous 34/45-Mbit/s Interface Card (3 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
P3P-3
Plesiochronous 34/45-Mbit/s Interface Card (3 ports) protected (hiT 7050

CC)
P2MP
Point to Multipoint
P2P
Point to Point
PBX
Private Branch Exchange
PC
Personal Computer
PCB
1) Printed Circuit Board,

2) Protection Control Byte
PCC
Power Supply for hiT 7050 CC
PCI
Peripheral Component Interconnect
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PCS
Plesiochronous Connection Supervision
PDC
Passive Dispersion Compensation
PDF
Portable Document Format
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDU
Protocol Data Unit
PEC
Power Extension Cable for hiT 7050 CC_ES
PF2G5
Packet Switch Fabric Card
PFP1
Power Supply Module on Main Board MFP1 for hiT 7050 FP1
PHY
Physical (Interface)
PIR
Peak Information Rate
PJE
Pointer Justification Event
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
PLL
Phase Locked Loop
PLM
Payload Mismatch
PM
1) Project Management
2) Performance Management
POADM
Passive Optical Add Drop Multiplexed
POH
Path Overhead (G.782) (G.783)
POS
Packet over SONET/SDH
POSIX
Portable Operating System Interface
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
PowerPC
Performance Optimization with Enhanced RISC
PPI
Plesiochronous Physical Interface
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
pps
Packets per second
PRAM
Persistent Random Access Memory
PRC
Primary Reference Clock
PS
Power Supply
PS300P-6
Ethernet Traffic interface card incl. L2 Switch for hiT 7050 CC
PSC
Peripheral System Controller
PSProtectionshelf Connection and Alarm Panel

COPA/NEAP
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
PTR
Pointer
PUBAT
Positive Power Supply Voltage
PVID
Port VLAN ID
Q
Q
Standardized Q-interface
QB3
Q Interface (QSTB3, QD2B3)
QEXT
External Q interface
Q-F
Operating Terminal Interface (Serial Interface, RS232)
QD2B3
Q-interface proprietary
QB3
Q Interface (QSTB3, QD2B3) (Ethernet Interface)
QL
Timing quality level
QOS
Quality Of Service
FT52428EN02GLA1
19
Abbreviations
QSTB3
QUICC
Quad Integrated Communication Controller
QST
R
RAID
Redundancy Array of Independent Disks
RAM
Random Access Memory
RAP
Reachable Address Prefix
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
RED
Random Early Detect
REI
Remote Error Indication
RFC
Request For Comment
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RISC
Reduced Instruction Set Computer
RJ11
Registered Jack, 4 or 6 pin
RJ45
Registered Jack, 8 pin
RMB
Right Mouse Button
RMON
Remote Network Monitoring
RN
Ring Node
ROM
Read Only Memory
RPR
Resilient Packet Ring
RS, Rsec
Regenerator Section (also Rsect) (G.783)
RSOH
Regenerator Section Overhead rows 1-3 from Section Overhead in STM1 (G.782) (G.783)
RS232
Recommended Standard 232
RSTP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTAI
Real Time Application Interface
RTC
Real Time Clock
Rx
Receive
20
S2M
Primary Multiplex Access (2 Mbit/sec)
SA
Source Address
SAN
Storage Area Network
SBS
Stimulated Brillouin Scattering
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
SC
1) Connector Type
2) Single Core (Single-Row Subrack)
SCOH
System Controller and Overhead (Card)
SD
1) Synchronization distribution
2) Signal Degrade (G.783)
SDF
System Data Format
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDI
Serial Debug Interface
SEC
SDH Equipment Clock
SELV
Separate Extra-Low Voltage
SEMF
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (G.782) (G.783)
SES
Severely Errored Second
SET
Synchronous Equipment Timing
SETS
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SF
Signal Fail (G.783)
SF10G
Low Order VC-3/VC-12 Switch Card (10 Gigabit switching capacity)
SF160G
Central VC-4 Switch Card
SF2G5
Low Order VC-3/VC-12 Switch Card (2,5 Gigabit switching capacity)
SFI-5
Serdes Framer Interface Level 5 (40Gbps)
SFM
Single Fiber Mode
SFP
Small Form-factor Pluggable (Optical Modules)
SIPAC
Connector Type
SL
Signal Label
SLD
Synchronous Line equipment (NE)
SLR
Synchronous Line equipment Regenerator
SM
1) Synchronous Multiplexed
2) Security Management
SMA
Synchronous Multiplexer (NE)
SMA-1K
Synchronous Multiplexer for STM-1, Core (NE)
SMF
Single Mode Fiber
SN
Switching network
SNC
Sub-Network Connection
SNCP
Subnetwork Connection Protection
FT52428EN02GLA1
21
Abbreviations
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNPA
Subnetwork Point of Attachment
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SOH
Section Overhead (G.782)
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network
SP
Service Pack
SPI
SDH Physical Interface (G.782) (G.783)
SPI-5
System packet Interface Level 5 (40Gbps)
SPRING
Shared Protection Ring (analog to BSHR)
SRPR
Siemens approach for RPR
SRP
Spatial Reuse Protocol (CISCO)
SRD-MSI
Subrack MSI Double Core
SRS-MSI
Subrack MSI Single Core
SSF
Server Signal Fail
SSL
Secure Socket Layer
SSM
Synchronization Status Message
SSU
Synchronization Supply Unit
STAI
Station Alarm Interface
STM
Synchronous Transport Module (G.782/783/784)
STM-N
Synchronous transport module, level N (N=1, 4, 16, 64, 256)
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
STS-N
Synchronous Transport Signal level N
STU-1
Synchronous Transit Unit for STM-1 (NE)
SU
1) System Unit
2) Switched Unit
SW
Software
22
T0
System Clock
T1
Timing Reference Signal from Line Signal
T3
External (G.783) Timing Reference Signal
T4
Timing Reference Output Signal (G.783)
TA
Transaction
T.b.d, TBD
To Be Defined
FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
TCA
Threshold Crossing Alert
TCP
Termination Connection Point

Transmission Control Protocol
TCN
Threshold Crossing Notification
TD
Transmit degraded
TDM
Time Division Multiplexing
TED
Technical Description
TEX
Ten Gigabit MUX
TF
Transmit fail
TIA
Telecommunications Industry Association
TIF
Telemetry Interface
TIM
Trace Identifier Mismatch
TL
Technical Requirement Specification
TL1
Transaction Language 1
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network (G.782) (G.783) (G.784)
TMOUT
Time out for failure of protocol
TMX
Terminal Multiplexer,
Termination Multiplexed
TNC
Transit Node Clock
TNM
Telecommunication Network Management
TNMS-C
Transport Network Management System Core
TNMS-CT
TNMS Craft Terminal
TOH
Transport Overhead
ToS
Type of Service
TP
Termination point
TP0
Transport Protocol Class 0
TP4
Transport Protocol Class 4
TSAP
Transport Service Access Point
TSD
Trail Signal Degrade
TSSU
Time Slot Switched Unit (internal traffic signal)
TSSU1
Time Slot Switched Unit (internal traffic signal 622.08Mb/s)
TSSU2
Time Slot Switched Unit (internal traffic signal 2.48832Gb/s)
TSF
Trail Signal Failed
FT52428EN02GLA1
23
Abbreviations
TTI
Trail Trace Identifier
TTL
Time to Live
TTs
Trail Termination supervisory function
TU
Tributary Unit
TUG
Tributary Unit Group
Tx
Transmit
TxDeg
Transmit Degraded
TxFail
Transmit Fail
U
UAS
Unavailable Second
UAT
Unavailable Time
UBAT
Battery Voltage
UC
Operating Voltage
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UHC
Ultra High Capacity
ULAF+
Universal Line Access Family
ULED
LED Voltage
ULH
Ultra Long Haul
UMN
User Manual
UMTS
Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
UNEQ
Unequipped
UNI
User Network Interface
UPS
Uninterrupted Power Supply
UTIF2
Universal Traffic Interface (internal traffic signal)
UTOPIA
Universal Test and Operations Physical Interface for ATM
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair
24
V.11
Physical / Electrical interface characteristics
VC
Virtual Container (G.782) (G.783)
VC-4
Virtual container level 4
VC-n
Virtual Container, level n
VCDB
Variable Configuration Data Block
VLAN
Virtual LAN (IEEE 802.1Q)

FT52428EN02GLA1
Abbreviations
VLANC
VLAN Concentrator
VPN
Virtual Private Network
VSR
Very Short Reach Connection (optical IF type)
W
W
Working
WAN
Wide Area Network
WDF
Watch dog fail
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WINS
Windows Internet Naming Service
WLS
WDM Longspan System
X
X
Symbol for "Cross-over"
XML
Extended Markup Language
Y
Z
1..9
10BT
10 Base Twisted Pair (Ethernet)
100BaseTX
100 Base Twisted Pair (Fast Ethernet)
100BaseFX
100 Base Optical interface (Fast Ethernet)
1000BaseLX Gigabit Ethernet optical Long-wavelength (1270 to 1355 nm)

1000BaseSX Gigabit Ethernet optical Short-wavelength (770 to 860 nm)
1000BaseT
Gigabit Ethernet electrical (dual twisted pair interface)
1000BaseZX Gigabit Ethernet optical Long-wavelength (1500nm-1580nm)

2F MSSPRING
Two Fiber Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring
4F MSSPRING
Four Fiber Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring
FT52428EN02GLA1
25
Abbreviations
26
FT52428EN02GLA1
Appendix
Appendix
FT5242EN02GLA01
Appendix
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
Rckenschilder 25 mm
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
Rckenschilder 35 mm
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
Rckenschilder 50 mm
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
Optical Networks
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01

Hit7080 - p1

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Hit7080 - p1

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Optical Networks

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

2009 Nokia Siemens Networks. All rights reserved.

Hardware and functionality

Operation: Traffic Setup

SURPASS hiT 7080

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

FT52421EN02GLA1 Course intro

This document consists of 464 pages.

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

1.Welcome to the Training Institute

SURPASS hiT 7080

SURPASS hiT 7080 - Standard Training for Service

Core and Advanced

SURPASS hiT 7080

SURPASS hiT 70 series

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;

recommended - but only optional

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;

Fig. 2 SURPASS hiT 7080 Core and advanced training courses

SURPASS hiT 7080 O&M; General Topics (FT5242-00S)

Maintenance: Advanced Topics

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS P2P Advanced Topics (FT5244-00S)

SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics (FT5236-00S)

Synchronization Basic Principles

Setting Options of Synchronization Parameters

...across SDH/PDH Boundaries

Handling Failures and Reconfigurations

SURPASS hiT 7080; EoS- L2 Switching Advanced Topics (FT5248-00S)

SURPASS hiT 7080 Installation & Commissioning (FT5249-00S)

SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050

SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 - Standard Training for Service

Core and Advanced

SURPASS hiT 7070,7050

SURPASS hiT 70 series

SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM;

recommended - but only optional

SURPASS hiT 7070,7050

SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025

SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025 - Standard Training for Service

Core and Advanced

SURPASS hiT 7060

SURPASS hiT 70 series

SURPASS hiT 7060

recommended - but only optional

SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020

SURPASS hiT 7060, 7030, 7020 - Standard Training for Service

Core and Advanced

SURPASS hiT 70 series

recommended - but only optional

SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050

SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 - Standard Training for Service

Core and Advanced

SURPASS hiT 7070,7050

SURPASS hiT 70 series

SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM;

recommended - but only optional

SURPASS hiT 7070,7050

SURPASS hiT 7500